ML20098F423
| ML20098F423 | |
| Person / Time | |
|---|---|
| Site: | Comanche Peak  |
| Issue date: | 09/26/1984 |
| From: | Brandt C EBASCO SERVICES, INC., TEXAS UTILITIES ELECTRIC CO. (TU ELECTRIC) |
| To: | |
| Shared Package | |
| ML20098F419 | List: |
| References | |
| OL, NUDOCS 8410020724 | |
| Download: ML20098F423 (214) | |
Text
Ql
- DOCMETED USNRC
.-UNITED STATES OF AMERICAz '84 g .-2 NI lb NUCLEAR REGULATORY' COMMISSION-BEFORE THE ATOMIC SAFETY AND LICENhdj. BOA _RDzlA:
ggch vo In the Matter of: )
)
TEXAS. UTILITIES ELECTRIC ); Dockets Nos. 50-445:and-COMPANY, _e _t a l . - ) 446 ,
0 (s_
)
(Comanche Peak Steam Electric- )- '(Application for Station, Units 1:and.2) -) : Operating License)-
AFFIDAVIT OF C. THOMAS BRANDT REGARDING J.J. LIPINSKY'S OCTOBER 8, 1983 TRIP REPORT My name_is C. . Thomas Brandt. 'I reside in Ft. Worth,-
Texas. I am employed by Ebasco Services, Inc. at Comanche ~
Peak Steam Electric Station. A statement of my educational' and professional qualifications has been received in-evidence as Applicants' Exhibit 141A.
I have reviewed a document entitled " Departmental Correspondence, Trip Report OBC Job No. H8301 (Comanche Peak Unit 1--Glen Rose, TX)." The Trip Report was prepared by-J.J. Lipinsky, and apparently summarizes Mr. Lipinsky's observations regarding the Comanche Peak coatings program, during a brief visit to the site in late July, 1983.
This affidavit addresses in detail the-background'of the Comanche Peak coatings program with respect to the items discussed by Mr. Lipinsky in the Trip Report. The affidavit also addresses several of his apparent concerns. R 8410020724 840929 PDR ADOCK 05000445 0 PDR j
2-MATERIALS STORAGE All ~ coatings materials are delivered to Ccimanche- P'eak
- at the Receiving Warehouse.- QC. personnel perform a receiving inspection, to ensure that the vendors'
~
Certificates of Compliance' list the appropriate _ batch and lot numbers, and to verify that these batch and-lot' numbers i correspond to'and are identified on each _containerf of _
coatings materials. The Receiving inspection also verifies that no containers were damaged in shipment.
) At this point, QC Receiving prepares a Receiving Inspection Report (RIR) attaching vendors'. documentation
[ attesting that received materials meet purchase order and specification requirements. A sample RIR is Attachment A to 1
this affidavit. In the event that coatings materials are damaged, or the vendors' documentation does not correspond to the received materials, the OC 1 spector must prepare a-Nonconformance Report (NCR), the nonconforming materials are identified with a hold tag in accordance with procedure CP-op 16.01 /, and the nonconforming materials are segregated from acceptable materials. Any materials on which an-NCR is written are retained in the Receiving Warehouse pending i disposition of the NCR.
i 1/' All quality procedures and construction procedures
- referred to, discussed in, and attached to this affidavit 1 were in effect in late July, 1983, at the time of Mr.
L Lipinsky's visit to the site.
<,t ,. - - -w. -,<g- = u 7 w yr.-.,m<--, ,,*.y w w -y --w- ,-e, - -
1 e
-.3-c
- :When-coatings mat'erialsiare found satisfactory at the-
' Receiving Warehouse, tdus coatings ' superintendent withdraws the protective' coatings materials utilizing a. Material' Requisition (MR) in accordance with' procedure CP-CPM 8.1.
(Attachment'B). A. sample MR is Attachment 2 to CP-CPM 8.1.
f0C Keceiving. personnel verify that the materials. requested-
.on'the MR are acceptable and initial the MR, . indicating that the materials are acceptable for release _to construction.
At this point, the~ material is-transported-to'the paint storage building, which is a separate enclosure with an-environmentally cor trolled climate. Requirements for storage in the paint storage building are outlined in Section 3.5, CCP-30, " Coating Steel ~Substrates Inside t
Reactor Building.and Radiation Areas" (Attachment C) and i
Section 3.5, CCP-40, " Protective Coating of Concrete Surfaces" (Attachment D).
- Applicants' Inspection Procedure QI-QP-ll.4-17, f " Surveillance of Storage and Handling of Protective Coatings" (Attachment E), requires QC personnel to perform a monthly surveillance inspection of'the paint storage facilities. The surveillance inspection must verify
o' That the storage facility's'environmentalicontrols- ,
are in place; o That no coatings containers are leaking or damaged;
~
, o That storage records reflect a."first-in, fi rs t-out" inventory procedure for coatings containers, thus precluding possible shelf life problems; f-o That all labels are legible and include. appropriate l identification-and control data; o
q
~ o That, in fact, the shelf life.of individual containers has not.been exceeded; ,
o That Class I and II coatings materials are segregated; and o In general, that the storage area is clean and organized.
The QA/QC inspector records the results of his surveillance on a report form prepared for that purpose.
Sample surveillance reports from actual inspections, showing the relevant inspection parameters, are attached to this affidavit (Attachment F).
Coatings materials are mixed in one of two locations.
Steel coatings and concrete finish coatings are mixed inside the coatings storage area immediately. prior to use, although mixing occasionally takes place in the field. Other coatings with short pot lives, such as concrete-surfacer, are mixed in the field immdiately prior to use. -In all cases, Applicants' procedures require mixing operations to be witnessed by a QC inspector. Section 3.3.5 of QI-OP-11.4-1, " Inspection of Steel Substrate Surface Preparation and Primer Application" (Attachment G to this affidavit) and 1
Section 3.3.5 of QI-QP-ll.4-5, " Inspection of Steel Sub-strate Primer Repair and Seal and Finish Coat Application and Repair" (Attachment H to this affidavit), for example, requires the inspector to verify, prior to mixing, that coatings materials containers are properly identified and appropriate for intended use, that each container is identified by batch number, and that the shelf' life has not
been-exceeded. The-inspector then witnesses the actual l
mixing operation, to verify that mixing is performed as procedures require. See also Section 3.2, QI-QP-ll.4-10,
" Inspection of Concrete Substrate Surface Preparation and Coatings Application and Repair" (OC inspection of mixing operations) (Attachment I to this affidavit); Section 4.3, CCP-30, " Coating Steel Substrates Inside Reactor Building and Radiation Areas" (construction procedure specifying mixing and application methods for steel coatings)
(Attachment C to this affidavit); Section 4.2, CCP-40,
" Protective Coating of Concrete Surfaces" (mixing and application procedures for concrete coatings) (Attachment D to this affidavit).
When coatings are mixed at the location where they are to be applied, the QC inspector witnesses the mixing operation and then enters the coatings materials' batch number and brand name directly on an inspection report.
When, however, coatings are mixed in the storage area for use in the field, a QC inspector witnesses the mixing and verifies that the operation has been performed properly.
The inspector then completes a paint mixing slip, which is physically attached to the container of coatings. The paint mixing slips include information such as product identifica-tion, batch number, and time of the mixing operation (see Paint Mixing Slip, Attachment 3 to Attachment G of this
l l
i affidavit). The paint mixing slip remains attached to the l coatings container as the-coatings materials are used by construction personnel in the field.
When the QC inspector inspects the actual application of coatings materials, he enters relevant data (i.e., batch nnmber and product identification) regarding the coatings materials either from-the container, if mixing takes place in the field, or the-mixing slip, if mixing is performed in the paint shop. See QI-QP-ll.4-1, Section 3.3.5, Attachment G; QI-QP-ll.4-10, Section 3.2, Attachment I; and QI-QP-11.4-5, Section.3.3.5, Attachment H.
In sum, from the moment that coatings materials arrive at Comanche Peak until they are applied, they must be and are inspected, identified, and controlled. Each step of the process is fully documented by QC inspectors.
WORKMANSHIP In any large-scale coatings program such as that at Comanche Peak, some runs and sags in applied coatings are inevitable. Applicants' inspection procedures specifically address runs and sags, and define acceptable--and unacceptable--limits for them.
Section 3.1.1.d.1 of Applicants' OI-QP-ll.4-5,
" Inspection of Steel Substrate Primer Repair and Seal and
-Finish Coat Application and Repair" (Attachment H to this
4 t .
affidavit), for example, requires the QC inspector to measure runs and sags in applied primer coats with a Dry _
Film Thickness (DFT) gauge. The. procedure specifies that runs or sags of 5.5 mils for Carbo-Zinc 11 (CZ-ll) are acceptable, unless evidence of mudcracking is present. In cases where the DFT limits are exceeded or mudcracking is evident, the runs and sags must be repaired. See Section 3.2.1 of QI-QP-ll.4-5-(Attachment H to this affidavit).
Applicants' quality procedures similarly address runs and sags in the finish coat-for steel substrate surfaces (Section 3. 6. 2.a of QI-QP-ll . 4-5, Attachment H to this affidavit), for runs and sags in concrete surfacer coatings (Section 3.4.2.1.a of QI-QP-ll.4-10, " Inspection of Concrete Application and Repair," Attachment I to this affidavit),
and for runs and sags in concrete finish coatings (Section 3.6.3.a of OI-OP-11.4-10, Attachment I to this affidavit).
In short, Applicants' quality procedures require that runs and sags be identified, define acceptable limits for such runs and sags, specify means for determining such, and require repair or rework if the runs and sags are unacceptable under the procedures. Runs and sags are, the re fore , fully addressed and controlled as part of Applicants' program.
_g_
PAINTER-QUALIFICATION AND INDOCTRINATION Mr. Lipinsky's trip report indicates that he perceived a problem with " painter qualification and indoctrination" (p. 1), and that "by Brown and Root estimates, only 34 out of 452 individuals'are of any value as painters" (p. 2).
Mr. Lipinsky's remark concerning "34 out of 452 individuals" being "of any value as painters" is, in'a sense, a statement of fact. At the time of his July, 1983 visit to Comanche Peak, Applicants employed 34 fully certified painters. Under construction and quality procedures, only a certified painter may actually apply (by brush or spray) safety-related coatings. All of the other (approximately 415) construction personnel in the paint department (commonly referred to as " painter helpers") were support personnel for the painters. These individuals construct scaffolding, prepare surfaces for coatings, and otherwise aid the coatings applicators. The support personnel are not, however, certified to apply coatings, and are not permitted to do so.
Applicants' procedures require painters to be certified by application method (brush or spray) and by product (for example, Carbo-Zinc 11 or Phenoline 305). To be certified, a painter must receive classroom instruction, pass written examinations, and satisfactorily apply coatings materials.to test panels. QC inspectors examine the painters' test
w- -
i
~ '
- _9_
panels to assure acceptability.of'the coatings under:
relevant procedures., Applicants maintain Painter Certification Records' for each certified painter,-reflecting
.the painters' instruction in coatings, and proficiency tests. Sample Painter Certification Records, for painters employed by. Applicants at Comanche Peak,'are attached to this affidavit (Attachment J). Applicants' Painter Certification Records are patterned after the sample form .
included in ANSI 101.4-1972 (Attachment.K to this-affidavit), and contain all the. relevant data of ANSI's sample form.
DOCUMENTATION Applicants' QC inspectors utilize Inspection Reports (IR's) to document inspections of coatings. work. Sample inspection reports for different types of coatings are attached to the quality procedures for those coatings (see Attachments G, H and I to this affidavit).
Also attached is Sample Form 8 of ANSI 101.4-1972, (Attachment L), which is ANSI's recommended form for inspec-tion records. As can be seen by comparing the ANSI form with those employed by Applicants, the forms in use at Comanche Peak not only require all of the relevant data included in ANSI's recommended form, but require far more information to be recorded by the inspector. The only data ,
L _ ________ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . - _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - - _ _
. included in- the ANSI fx_:.c that Applicants do .not' require _ in -
IR's are_the namefof'the: shift foreman--the; entry of which' is unnecessary to qualit'y control--theLeondition'of " sky,"
" wind" and " precipitation"--which'are totally irrelevant to the quality of safety-related coatings inside containment--
and type of DFT gauge used, which Applicants specify elsewhere, by procedure (see, for example, section 3.1.1.d.1 of QI-QP-11.4-5, Attachment H).
Applicants' Inspection Reports fully meet ANSI standards.
COATINGS INTEGRITY Mr. Lipinsky's Trip Report (p. 4, paragraphs E, F) notes a concern with Applicants' practice of power grinding CZ-ll to achieve acceptable dry film thicknesses, and with the application of Phenoline 305 over existing Phenoline 305.
CZ-ll, which is short for Carbo-Zinc 11, is a primer used at Comanche Peak to coat steel substrate surfaces. The practice of power grinding excessive film thicknesses.of CZ-ll is based on recommendations provided by CZ-ll's i
manufacturer, Carboline Company, in an October 26, 1976 letter to the Applicants (Attachment M to this affidavit).
With respect to excessive dry film thicknesses of CZ-ll, Carboline refers to ASTM D.l.043, Special Technical
Publication Chapter 10, Section 10.9.3.2 (" localized areas
- of excessive film thickness that are not acceptable may be treated as runs or sags") (Attachment M, p. 3). ASTM D.l.043, Standard Technical Publication, Section 10.9.1.2, stat 1s that all runs and sags "that were not repaired while wet shall be removed by suitable means such as sanding or grinding." (Attachment O, p. 2) Applicant's practice of I power grinding excessive film thicknesses' of Carbo-Zinc 11 is, therefore, fully approved by the manufacturer as consistent with ASTM standards. Attachment M, p. 3.
Mr. Lipinsky apparently questioned the use of a solvent wipe to prepare a previously-applied coating of Phenoline 305, a finish coating, for a new coating of Phenoline 305.
l This practice is also based upon Carboline's recommendation (by letter dated July 14, 1976, Attachment N to this affidavit) that "To topcoat a year or so later it would be necessary to thoroughly solvent wipe the existing 305 surface with an appropriate thinner to insure that all contaminants are removed prior to topcoating."
Applicants' practice of applying more than one coat of Phenoline 305 was a solution to potential " bubbling" problems that occur when epoxies, such as Phenoline 305, are applied over inorganic zinc coatings, such as carbo-Zine 11.
Carboline recommended that Applicants apply a thin film tie coat of Phenoline 305, over the carbo-Zinc 11 (see
c Attachment N). In recommending this practice, Carboline understood that recoat of the sealed surface could be months, or even years, away, as the letter makes clear.
THE USE OF IR'S AND NCR'S TO REPORT DEFICIENCIES Mr. Lipinsky's Trip Report (p. 3) reflects his apparent belief ("No NCR's") that coatings QC inspectors at Comanche Peak were not permitted to utilize Nonconformance Reports.
He vTs mistaken.
At the time Mr. Lipinsky visited the site in late July, Comanche Peak coatings inspectors had written a total of 87 NCR's during calendar 1983: 24 in the first three months; 63 in the second three months. Had Mr. Lipinsky reviewed the non-ASME NCR log during his visit, he could not have left the site with the impression that he apparently did.
Subsequent to Mr. Lipinsky's visit to the site, management implemented a clarificatien and elaboration of existing inspection procedures to encourage the use of unsatisfactory irs, and not NCR's, to report all discrepant conditions except adhesion failures. This program fully meets all relevant requirements of Appendix B to 10 C.F.R. Part 50 and ANSI N45.2 with respect to nonconforming conditions, i.e., control, identification, documentation, segregation, disposition, and notification of the affected organization.
'b
~
.Even under the procedures prescribing the use of
~ inspection reports to document nonconforming conditions, QC inspectors have continued to write NCR's in certain; cases, with the advice and support of management. In the last six months of calendar 1983, for example, QC inspectors wrote 57 NCR's, 38 of these coming in the last three months of the /
year.
AUDITS Between October, 1981 and July,'1983 (when Mr. Lipinsky first visited the site), the Comanche Peak coatings program underwent 4 audits by Texas Utilities ' corporate auditors.
These audits covered all aspects of the Comanche Peak coatings program, and revealed few deficiencies of any substance. All deficiencies noted in these audits were corrected.
During the same period, the NRC's Region IV conducted 4 inspections and audits addressing numerous aspects of the O
t i
Comanche Peak coatings program. These inspections and
~
audits showed few deficiencies of substance, and those have been corrected.
[ /
f'?;
~.;f' J/. if . % // A pC j ~
.y _ '/j ' l i,/'
/ /
C. Thomas Brandt Subscribed and sworn to before'me this.-/ 'feday of September, 1984.
/'
/.)
./ '(f.,-6
_,~ '
..,.,.a N'atary Public My Commmsion Empires May, J1,1947 o
AFFIDAVIT OF C. THOMAS BRANDT TABLE OF ATTACHMENTS A -Sample Receiving Inspection Report (RIR) for coatings B CP-CPM 8.1, Rev. 1 (Feb. 24, 1982)
C CCP-30, Rev. 10 (Jan. 26, 1982)
D CCP-40, Rev. 5 (Aug. 18, 1982)~
E QI-QP-ll.4-17, Rev. 6 (June 17, 1983)
F Sample coatings storage surveillance reports G QI-QP-ll.4-1, Rev. 11 (July 5, 1983)
H QI-QP-11.4-5, Rev. 16 (July 5, 1983)
I QI-QP-ll.4-lO, Rev. 12, (July 6, 1983)
J Sample Painter Certification Records K Sample Painter Certification Record form recommended by ANSI 101.4-1972 L Sample form for inspection record recommended by ANSI 101.4-1972 M Carboline Company letter to Brown & Root, Inc. dated October 26, 1976 N Carboline Company letter to Gibbs & Hill, Inc. dated July 14, 1976 I
1
1 Attachment A Sample Receiving Inspection Report (RIR) for coatings
REPORT NO.
y g QUALITY ASSURANCE RECEIVING INSPECTION REPORT UNIT SYSTEM COMPONENT IDENTIFIC ATION/ SPIN NO. DWG./ SPECIFIC ATION & R EV.
fs? 0iVIL Of[fjf SLgg 6$_Lca) 4S23-AS-J/
P.O. MRR CH AR ACTERISTIC INSPECTION: @44-O A P-M 2. /
CPF-/3%s
[hh SAT. UNSAT. NCR HOLD TAG APPARENT RESPONSIBILITY FOR UNSATISFACTORY ITEMS:
VENDOR SW/QRQ gg B&R VENDOR TR ANSPO RTER
[ $ D ATE DEFICIENCY CLOSED ITEM QT Y. DESCRIPTION / REM ARKS ffk0[]kk #$0 YUVW$k N' Gkb
- YlYb yo seau n)
\WC?N-)?. .,,
000@ PP s 44 .
QA RECORD y
AM .
COMPLETE
" "f ; (o pagts D4ft 7 d wr SUBFILE NO. r ~ 60 Raw c \
AUTHORIZED NUCLE AR INSPECTOR NOTIFIC ATION:
DATE: TIM E: MEDIA: N/A t/ INIT.
ANI WITNESS: SAT. W W UNSAT. W W WAIV ED D ATE:
- # AN1'S INITI ALS REQUIRED
.TORAGE LOCATION: b M
, TYPE: -
oc i.8/3 I Page / 0' l
l l
on--
BROWN & ROOT INC. !
Quality Assurance Department RECEIVING PROTECTIVE C0ATING MATERIAL SAT UNSAT N/A
- 1. Ensure vendor documents are available and are as follows:
a.
b.
Product Identification Certificate B&R Source Inspection Record or
[
Waiver Source Inspection Record fh,r. ,
- c. Product Identification Certifications f 5%* T'..g**"i'e,plj]k{I are legible, complete and the test .
- '!i data is within range specified for ; % % .,.,,
the product / formulation L[
, - L , _/
w.s.' '- ,'et M L {.'P'
- 2. Verify coating material is procured '
from a source approved by Gibbs & Hill ,
Spec. 2323-AS-31. W' "f/
- 3. The Product Identification certification for each product shall be legible, complete, and the test data reported be within the range specified for the product / formulation. [
- 4. Check all containers for following:
- a. Complete and tignc closures g
- b. Leaking and puncture damage g
- 5. Ensure container has a label and each label has the following infomation: .
- a. Product Identification g
- b. Manufacturer Identification g
- c. Batch Number 7
- d. Date of Manufacture /
Verify that the shelf life of the product, 6.
except thinners, did not exceed 24 months. j Comments: A/0A/5 Receiving Inspector /> o ' M Date b.3 s,e L , ,
RIR 2 27 8 5 4;
3 age 2 of l
p Q / ~
Job No. 35 M 95 MATERIAL RECElVED RECORD COMANCHE PEAK S.E.S.
PAGE I OF I MRNO.139829 1 l
a4R G&H F&N W TUSI OTHER SHIPPED TO: O u a E u P.O NO. CPF-1306 REQ.NO.
R-21297. 21298 SUP 29 l VENDOR: DATE:
CAR 80LINE OF TEXAS PLANO, TEXAS 8 2-83 SHIPPER: F. O. B.
Same Alpha, Ohio SPPPA PartialO 38 comoi.e. O ouanmv I unir new unnam oesCn.rnon tocanon 1000 gal 6 Phenoline Thinner in 5 gal kits . . . . . W/A QA Rec -.
. Batch 3G1882M . 3600.X1 . . . . . , . . . . . .
3N .. . .. ~ . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . _ . . . _
1 lot CERTS rec'd w/ shipment ff.ff'g. g ,, .} g,, :.g,,,,w.
Issued QA Rec o". +
.. j n.. , ,
.. frg. _ . ], 's ' 3,,[.. , , ,
p -:., ,
"/l
. . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . . . c: 4 . . . . . . p . . .. , _ . . . . . .
.. . . . .s . . . .
--- I
. . . _ . .. .........._._...._.....1..
....s N. . . -. .! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~ . _ . . . . . . . .
=
.. ...__ _ , , ..__ _.. y. , ...- .. . , , . . . . . . . , _ . . . . . . . . . .. . . , .
-_. THIS INSPE CTION.. . .. . . . . ._ ._ .
._...___...m.__ . .
.
- w* . . '_ _ .
- N. .
. ...:. . 1p~.*-l...i _.;. .... - .- .
R..I..R.N.O.p.
4 2 7P5. .. . - _- ..
n . w.
n
~. ,
- ....~.. . . - _ . . l.w . . :u. a _l1. : c. w w d a . ... w _ . -
u -a. : ... _. -.
Q.C. CHECx sy EJP. PP Ma UPS PREPAs0 COLLECT l R. 0111ff RECEIVED BYi '
2/[ XXXXX ro 760.01 l
Central s OEuvtmireG CammitR gs 8-2-83 Paint n o no ca.~o
- 13404945-1 Page 0: 6
l l
TEXAS UTILITIES SERVICES INC.
- '*" " " "" ^ " " * * '
QAA- 3289 Carboline Company July 18, 1983 350 Hanley Industrial Ct.
St. Louis,' Missouri 63144 Attention: Linda Melchoir TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING COMPANY C(NANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION PURCHASE ORDER CPF-1306-S, Supp.29 AUTHORIZATION FOR SHIPMENT By copy of this letter TUGC0 Quality Assurance releases the following equipment to be shipped by Carboline of Texas :
CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL ITEM 6 1000 gal. Phenoline #305 Thinner in 5 gal . kits ITEM 7 500 gal. Pheroline #305 in one gallon kits, each kit shall consist of two individually packaged components as follows: A partially filled one" gallon container of base material and a one quart container of catalyst.
Color White C800.
ITEM 21 25 gal. AD-51,' Gray / Green, one (1) gallon kits, color to match 4312 ITEM 24 25 gal. AD-51, Cream, one (1) gallon kits, color to match 1845 ITEM 26 25 gal. A0-51, Gray one (1) gallon kits, color to match 2787 ITEM 27 25 gal. AD-51, Black, one (1) gallon..kf ts,- coroFTo match C900 ~
7 C .~. ',* 7'.: ,',', \
j ij'.,,,\
- ' ,J ,{\
i i i ' :.. ,
"I. ' '
,y 9 4
QQ' a pow p
l l/ Final shipment inspected, QAR No.
q Final inspection waived g 0% b- Q- ,,
fB3
- SKM:keu IUGC0 QA Inspectqr Date A. Vasey - G&H N.Y.
R. Tolson D. Frankum B. Jones D. Chapman - TUGC0 QA Dallas L. Johnson - TUGC0 QA Dallas llggg7oe 09 R. Meissner - Whse."A" Q.C. Rec. 3
[ ,-
[
,-w .
-y . - - - - - ,------n - - . . , + - - . , , - - - , ,
l
. .. . ,- ci ii u . u __ l SHIPPING INSPECTION FORM DATE 9-) (,-/] _ ___
- 1) CUSTOMER, A //Mim
- 2) INVOICE I 2 94/f / ,
- 3) CUSTOMER PURCHASE ORDER # &##/]St-f RELEASE i 89
- 4) TYPE OF JOB: ( g ) NUCLEAR
( ) STATE
. ( ) STANDARD
( ~ )'OTHER
- 5) CERTIFICATIONS REQUIRED: ( >< ) YES a
( ) NO
- 6) TYPE OF CERTIFICATION REQUIRED:
(4) PICR
( ) CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE NOTARIZED ( )YES ( )NO
( ) STATE
( ) OTHER-SPECIFY
- 7) SHIPMENT COUNT: O /- d .- ~
\
. r: = .\
ej, , ...** , ,,
i .-1 -
\*"-
, .Yb i
;,..; ~a^:s.?
. s
~..~ _; . ,- t
- \ -)
.,g.._
\ '.
- t TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING
'7 C/D COMMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION ' -
FM 201 , GLEN ROSE , h 0 's fd'Cee1306-5SuP2, 71383 13965600 2T451 PPD C A00 QA-100982 - RIR, 2.2 7 8 5
? age- 0" 6
..co un.;
mQ, yA ggj, f,J., GBZOER P. o. tePF/304-S &W
. , ,,o. y E = a M
Cax.ne 1mozcz e 2 7u.sv AlznassK /Aatt ld FMDo) _ M "q)u 3.'3!9 jff,. M 160W A1'ZMt1'1W Cf %. 373 -(2/0M1 -/2/ NMe CF PIC ECT I smaue aan l ants mae.r wA 3G/PP2M Date of Manufacture WA SMn - /9/f 5 Essif Life 24 Raltle 2rh Exp. Date
$ Neight Per Gallon c[Nya 'Z //
O g (FDS 141a, 4184) 7.1-7.4 Lbs . r-n Ibs. e x M Flash Point (AirIM D-93, 77 *y
,} g Pensky-Martans r1nmaa op) WA jO esis act s tw tad ny--Initial / Data dj. / 140-73 E Wmal Mixing hoount Per Gallon See Cartdline 4kalicatb Instructicris.
. 1q
? ,s , f
. vt y ,
~ m.
E E '!-[,kt. (f
.5 '*
f5 W g Stis prixhrt is harnby certified as nunufactursi in accordance with the E Carboline Quality Assurance Psc.p.-. Wurt used in accordanos with Cartoline
; printed instructions, it is within annufacturing tolerances of the batches c crigimily tastal in u::sr&mca with ANEI N101.2, ANSI N101.4 and ANSI NS12.
o #mM Si I h 2N h hts: 9-) 4,- /3 e N)_'L J ; ^ fR vitles . La.s 9-> c -n RIR 227 8 5 rom D,t, a >Os/r> n, ? age 6 - 0l 6 Approval Sh G M M s QB-31683 I 1
-_ _ _ - _ - _ _ . . - . . _ , . _ , _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . . . _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ . . _ . _ . . - . _ . _ . , _ . _ _ . _ _ . _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ . . _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ . ~ . .
Attachment B CP-CPM 8.1, Rev. 1 (Feb. 24, 1982) __ __ _ _ __. __ __ _ __ _ __.__________._.______.______.______-____________.._______.____.______._.____._--m._._.-____ --
,_ _ mnrvrn j 8ROWN & ROOT, INC. PROCEDURE SY.ICT.IVE CPSES NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE JOB 35-1195 CP-CPM 8.1 ,
1 2/24/82 1 of 5 TITLE: ORIGINATOR: .< > 2-9-62 RECEIPT, STORAGE, OATE , AND ISSUANCE OF ITEMS REVIEWED BYMkt Atq8E/[V. < 8M PL QA/g/ l DATE , APPROVED BY: T-Y/ >_ 2 3 ~5'2 / CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER DATE o.i TABLE OF CONTENTS e *
1.0 INTRODUCTION
C INSPECTION 5 1 7 3.0 3.1 PROCEDURE ARRIVAL AT SITE Q L,3 l. Q Q (( h 7 y ?! p'.2% 2..;wgg
- h*.,g.f
})
f 3.2 RECEIPT \ , ;* 3.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING CCPY . 3.4 ISSUANCE OF ITD15 .- U 3.5 RETURN TO WAREHOUSE * [C(jp1TN i- - 3.6 0FF-SITE SHIPMENT - '
; yCjgjef 4.0 ATTACHMENTS bc# M ';
dC4h,1, No. I Matatal Received Record No. 2 No. 3 Material Requisition Material Return to Warehouse NNi
- u No. 4 Oc v
- J' Return Goods Authorization No. 5 Appendix I
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This procedure provides the system for receiving, storage. and issuance of safety-related and non-safety-related items received at this site. Spare parts are not within the scope of this procedure and are discussed in supplementing instructions. 2.0 GENERAL 2.1 RECEIPT INSPECTION Receipt inspection of safety-related items will be perfonned by the QA Department in accordande with QA procedures. Receipt inspection of non-safety-related items is the responsibility of ~ the warehousing personnel and the discipline engineers as dis-cussed herein.
- - - = _ .
W '
. El BROWN & ROOT, INC. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE CPSES NLMBER REVISION DATE PAGE J08 35-1195 CP-CPM 8.1 1 2/24/82 1 of 5 TITLE: ORIGINATOR: *** See Original Cover Sheet RECEIPT, STORAGE.
AND ISSUANCE OF ITEMS REVIEWED BY: *** See Original Cover Sheet 55R QA DATE
*** See Oriainel Cover Sheet It'sco qm DATE APPROVED BY *** See Original Cover Sheet COnsIRUCTION PROJ M DATE
=
0.1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.0 INTRODUCTION
2.0 GENERAL 2.1 RETIR INSPECTION 3.0 PROCEDURE 3.1 ANNf?ACTrSITE 3.2 RECEIPT 3.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING 3.4 ISSUANCE OF ITEMS 3.5 RETURN TO WAREHOUSE 3.6 0FF-SITE SHIPMENT 4.0 ATTACMENTS No. 1 Material Received Record No. 2 Material Requisition No. 3 Material Return to Warehouse No. 4 Return Goods Authorization No. 5 Appendix ! '
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This procedure provides the syste for receiving, storage, and issuance of safety-related and non-safety-related itms received at this site. Except as specifically required by supplementing instructions, spare parts are not within the scope of this procedure. 2.0 GENERAL - 2.1 RECE!PT INSPECTION Receipt inspection of safety-related itms will be performed by the QA Department in accordance with QA procedures. Receipt inspection of non-safety related items is the responsibility of the warehousing personnel and the discipline engineers as dis-cussed herein. P-CPM 8.1 Rey. 1 OCN #3 11/5/02 Sheet ? nf ?
r l J08 35-1195 COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER S Notice applicable to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195- cp.cpH g_i Rev. 1 . This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. Change thsprocedure as follows: Please replace the following page with the attached: Page 2 of 5 Reviewed by:
't h Triginator ff-ffdf Date Bf Brown & Root Mf3 ality Assura ce Date g
$ &f)
Approved by: Date TUGC0 Qua / ssurance A
.h/h w //- /- 7 iL.
CbnstrucTian' Project Manager' Date Decenber 7,1983 Effective Date X*-ALl51
1 l l J08 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station Sheet 1,of 2 Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CHANrsE NOTICE MER 4 This notice applfes to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195 CPM 8.1 Revision 1 . This change will te incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. Change tWedure as follows: Replace the following page with the attached: Page 5 of 5 4 Reason for change: Additional requirement. , Reviewed by: Oraginator WJk2
' cate ddth .
f} ~ Brown & A44t- 1tyAssurpa cact
...t ,,
Approved by: f ,* 8a TUGCo QuaIIty Assurance Date A hh
- l-/O '$' W _
ll10l83 ~ Gonstruction Projec- Manager Date Effec 1ve Date 2...
JOB 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station Sheet 1 of 2 Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NimBER 3 This notice applies to Constrwtion Procedure No. 35-1195. CPM 8.1 Revision 1 . This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: Replace the following page with the attached: Page 1 of 5 Reason for change: , Additional requirements. Reviewed by: LY^ //// FAB 1 s'V _ L' Ofiginator ' Date Brown & Roc ality Ass e Gate Reviewed by: // EE lL TUGCo Quality Assurance Date A z/# /46292 Gonstruction Project Manager 11/5/82 Data Effective Data
J08 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station Sheet 1 of 2 Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE MJM6ER 2 This notice applies to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195 CPM 8.1 Revision 1 . This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. Change the pmcedure as follows: Replace the following page with the attached: Page 2 of 5 f b t Reason for change: Additional requirements ,, . j Revi by: . W Mk: OMginator t/ $ Date U. 5
& ~ 9 25 V ioot qualitt Assurance 04te Revt ys Approved by: >/
Ko Quhlif@urance / Date 0 0 . h 6 ,+ b ,, 3-2 76 0lEl02 Construction Project .9anager Qate iffective Qate I
, ARMS INDEXED J08 35-1195 - - * "
yi. Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station Sheet 1 of 2 Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CMNSE NOTICE NUMBER 1 This notice applies to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195- CPM 8,1 Revision 1 . This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. Change t,he procedure as follows: Replace the following page with the attached: - Page 1 of 1 Attachment 4 a r Reason for change: Additional requirements Reviewed by: W $l (.Gergine ter
.iV/W12
@ te 4MI4t% -_ . w aCs 3f!0lA2 Irown & Root Qualit# Assurance Gate Approved by:
I r / A ,,_ a .5- 20 'r L- 3/23/82 construction Project Nnager Gate Effective Date
~~
um
._________.___._.._._______.._.____.____..__________t._.__._
BROWN &' ROOT, INC. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE CPSES NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CP-CPM 8.1 l l 2/24/82 2 of 5 3.0 PROCEDURE 3.1 ARRIVAL AT SITE Upon arrival of items at the site, the following actions shall be taken by the warehousing personnel: 3.1.1 Determine if the shipment is safety-related or nonsafety-related. If safety-related, notify QC by copy of the packing list; if nonsafety-arelated, notify the appropriate engineering discipline. 3.1.2 Prior to offloading, verify the packing list against the purchase 't order. Check for evidence of shipping damage. Obtain handling and storage instructions, as required, and proceed in accordance with - those instructions. EXCLUSION: Radioactive materials other than those used by Brown & Root for radiography, shall not be of floaded. Instead, the Tugco Operations Radiation Protection personnel shall be notified so that they may inspect the shipment for quantity, correctness, and damage, advise the warehousing personnel of their findings and assume custody of the ' materials. Af ter the inspection by Tugco Operations Radiation Personnel, all receiving records shall be pro-cessed in accordance with this procedure, and QC shall verify that the documentation required by the purchase order is received, and transmit the documentation to the PPRV. 3.1 2 Warehousing personnel shall notify QC of damage, documentation shortages, or other nonconforming conditions of safety-related i items. The appropriate engineering discipline shall be notified for nonsafety-related iteme. 3.2. RECEIPT 3.2.1 The receipt of all items received on site shall be recorded on a Material Received Record (MRR; Attachment 1) by warehousing personnel. The entries on MRR shall include the quantity, heat, code, or other identification numbers, certification received /not received, and any other information pertinent to the receipt of the item. 3.2.2 The MRR's for safety-related items shall be presented to QC for _ signa ture. The. "QC Check By" block for nonsafety-related HRR's ' shall be marked "N/A" and initialed by the person making the entry.
' ~
.l
% g
^
CP-CPM 8.1 Rev.1 OCN h5 , "
, \ 12/07/83 Sheet 2 of 2
. t- .. _ _ _ . ._, _
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES l JOB 35-1195 CP-CPM 8.1 1 2/ 24/82 3 of 5 3.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING t Within each of the storage areas (type A through E as-delineated in Appendix 1) safety-related items should be physically separated from non-safety-related items, and identified. Where segregation is not practical, due to size, configuration, or specific storage requirements, etc. , positive identification shall be maintained which clearly identifies the material. Itans in storage which are to become a part of temporary or permanent facilities shall be clearly identified by purchase order
. numbers with the exception of bulk items such as pipe, fittings, pipe hangers, valves, etc. , which will be stored and identified by either their piece numbers, category numbers, size or generic e, number. Prior to division of a bundle of bulk material, each piece of materials shall be identified with a heat number. A heat code and purchase order number may be used instead of a heat number. Prior to division of the bundle QC shall be' notified so that the markings may be verified and documented in accordance with applicable QA procedures. -
With the exception of stockpiled earth materials, all items shall be stored on dunnage or by other suitable means such as on racks, in bins, on clean concrete floors, etc. .
~
All storage areas shall b'e kept clean and neat. Location records of all items should be provided. Anytime the location of an item is chcnged, the record should be updated. Nonconforming items, where practical, shall be stored in segregaged areas. Where size, configuration, storage requiremeents, etc. , do not pennit, the nonconforming items may be stored with acceptable items but shall be clearly identified with tags, signs, or barriers as being on " hold". Storage requirements will be specified in instructions which sup-plement this procedure. 3.4 ISSUANCE OF ITEMS All items shall be issued by means of a Material Requisition Form (MR; Attachment 2). QC concurrence by means of the initialling , on the MR form shall be required (for safety-related items) except ' for the building department stock material, such as bolts, nuts, Richmond Screw Anchors, Hilti-Kwik bolts, etc. i For all items, the properly-prepared requisition will be authorized by the appropriate department craf t superintendent or supervisor. Upon release from the warehouse, the person accepting delivery shall ! sign the requisition showing both name and badge number. j
~ :15% ; .
~
l
__ __ _ _ _ -~ PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN in ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES ' JOB 35-1195 CP-CPM 8.1 1 2/24/82 4 of 5 The applicable information required on the Material Requisition is self-explanatory. As a minimum, it should include enough infor-mation to provide traceability of the item and should include the purchase order number except when requisitioning expendable con-struction material and bulk items such as pipe, pipe fittings, pipe hangers, pipe spools, floor drains, gaskets, nuts, bolts, studs, washers, lead, etc. Typical information required is:
- a. Item description
- b. Item identification (e.g. , heat number, code number, lot number, tag or serial number)-
, c. Quantity
- d. Intended use .
The listed information will be used as a means of providing trace-ability of items, and ensuring their use where intended or acceptable. Where required, the QC-signed MR shall be presented to the QC field inspector before the item is installed so that the inspector may verify the acceptability of the item for the intended use. Deviations to the specified intended use will be permitted if verified as accept-able by QC.
, NOTE: The " intended use" entry is not meant to restrict the use of '
4 an item to a particular location, but only to signify that i the item is acceptable for use in that location. The same sequence and use of the MR shall be followed by the fabri-cation shops when material is issued directly from the shops to . f the field for installation. 3.5 RETURN TO WAREHOUSE Items which have been withdrawn from the warehouse and are not needed or which have been fabricated by B&Rgonstruction and are , to be returned to the warehouse for later installation, shall be transmitted to the warehouse by the " Material Return to Warehouse" , form (Attachnent 3). The responsible craft shall initiate the form. l Each form shall have a unique number. The warehouse shall treat i these similar to the MRR's. The traceability markings on all "Q" items must be legible. Itcri which are not traceable shall be , placed in non-safety-related stock. QC shall verify acceptance l for safety-related items. - l - f
! EFFECTIVE i BROWN & ROOT, INC.
PROCEDURE NUMBER i REVISION DATE l
- PAGE i I +
CPSES ! l \ s , JOB 35-1195 l CP-CPM 8.1 1 2/24/82 l 5 of 5 3.6 0FF-SITE SHIPMENTS Written requests and authorization shall be required for the item to be shipped off-site. The form shown as AttacNnent 4 will be utilized when possible. A copy of the shipping records shall be transmitted to Quality Assurance for "Q" items. For "Q" items, the shipping record shall be presented to "QC Receiving" prior to shipping for verification of material being shipped. I
~
I l . CPM 8.1 Rev. 1 DCN #4 1/10/83 Sheet 2 of 2 i I L
r- . - . PROCEDUR" EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CP-CPM 8.1 1 2/24/82 1 of 1 ATTACHMENT 1 MATERIAL RECElVED RECORD Job No. 351195 COMAfeCHE PEAK S. E. S. PAGE OF , 'MR NO. 8&R G&H F&N W TUSI OTHER SHIPPEO TO: O O O O O O r. O. NO. REO.NO. . VE don- DATE-SHIPPE R. F O 8. P-u O c iO - - guase ft fy i use.7 eTges e naa7Ensah 0ESCas TION LOCATDOM e ,a 6-
. . . . y.
1 j 1 TYPICAL . e 9 1 I . - I j l l l: - I i
- c. c c. ., s. ;g ui .. . o causer f RECEIVED SY:
I
....A.....
F.An CA. 88@. ! . I I I 1 M _E %
- - -w- - , . - , .,
l
. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 .
CP-CPM 8.1 1 2/24/82 1 of 1 ! ATTACHMENT 2 i BROWN & ROOT, INC.
- CPSES MATERIAL REQUISITION pp HEAT / T/S RIAL g OUANT TY DESCRIPTION & TAG NUMBER m
i I t lNTENDED USE-AECEfvEO - AUTHOAITY- iSSt>ED REQU4SITIONER
I PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE i BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE j CPSES l JOB 35-1195 CP-CPM 8.1 1 2/24/82 1 of 1 ATTACHMENT 3 n a Brownf5 Root,Inc. O g MATERIAL RETURN TO WAREHOUSE omonArcsy Po a M QUANT 1W DGCRIPTION LOCATION h e o i
. t em . wampeouum QC l
[ l
- - ~
r-, - - . , , - , . - , , , n.--- - n-..
-l l
l PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER , REYISION DATE PAGE CPSES f i l JOB 35-1195 j i l CP-CPM 8.1 l 1 2/ 24/82 1 of 2 ATTACHMENT 4
' O RETURNED GOODS 7 AUTHORIZATION RGA PO/FR DATE VENDOR TELE plP TO TELE ADDRESS VIA PPD ' COL REASON FOR RETURN i i
QTY ITEM DESCRIPTION 4 1 PERSON AUTHORIZING RETURN s DEPT EXT l RECEIVED AT WHSE "A" SHIPOUT DATE LOC DATE AUTH TO RETURN SHIPMENT TO VENDOR PER ON DOCUMENT # APPROVAL DATF - 8 & R EXPEDITOR MGR ACCOUNTING Am CPM 8.1 Rev. 1 DCN #1 3/23/82 Sheet 2 of 2
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE , BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CP-CPM 8.1 1 2/24/82 1 of 1 APPENDIX I Storage Environmental Conditions for items: J E
- 1. Type A Items shall be stored under special conditions similar to those described for Type B items but with additional require-ments such as temperature and humidity control within ,
specified limits, a ventilation system with filters to provide an atmosphere free of dust and harmful vapors, and any other appropriate requirements.
- 2. Type B Items shall be stored within a fire resistant, tear resistant, weathertight, and well ventilated building or equivalent en-closure. Precautions shall be taken against vandalism. This I area shall be situated and constructed so that it will not be
,, subject to flooding; the floor shall be paved or equal and well drained. Items shall be placed on pallets or sharing to permit air circulation. The area shall be provided with uniform heating and temperature control or its equivalent to prevent ,
condensation and corrosion. Minimum temperature shall be 40 F and maximum temperature shall be 140 F or less if so stipu-lated by c manufacturer.
- 3. Type C Items shall be stored indoors or equivalent with all provisions and requirements set forth in Type B items except that heat and temperature control is not required.
- 4. Type D Outdoor storage in an area which is well drained and reasonably removed from the actual construction area and traffic. Items shall be on cribbing or equivalent and protected from the weather with weather-proof coverings.
f
- 5. Type E Outdoor storage in an area which is well drained and reasonably removed from the actual construction area and traffic. Items
_ shall be on cribbing or the equivalent. , e A _b
. ~ . r . . , - .-. __r . _ . , ,__ - _ w ,. , , . . , , ,y
Attachment C CCP-30, Rev. 10 (Jan. 26, 1982) l
'v- -
;.a w . ..c.e.. .. 3 ,,,
3 . , F f DW BROWN & ROOT, INC. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE CPSES NUMBER REVISION DN FAs
,~ MATE-JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 I/26/82 1 of 13 TIT 1.E: ORIGINATOR: NW d2/Ib /-Ud2 DATE COATING STEEL SUB- /,9 STRATES INSIDE REVIEWED BY: /M- / /dC REACTOR BUILDING AND RADIATION AREAS
/g,8&R AA L C.( . Lh-mA p / 25-32 .
TUGC0 QA f/ '// OATE. APPROVED BY [ # O[fuM /-14-f2 DATE CONSTRUCTION PR04EST MANAGER Deaf # - o.1 TABLE OF CONTENTS oC# #./
- t. I. '
O cd "3
1.0 INTRODUCTION
pgg y ' T , 1.1 1.2 PURPOSE SCOPE Q 6 ft T pg 4 1.3 GENERAL DISCUSSION
.,5 9
'A ,
4.0 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
. . Ed !
(. 3.0 SPECIAL ITEMS AND OPERATIONS ,
.5.1." r:3.1 QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL 3.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS eG V~M.3 INSTRUMENTS AND THEIR USE
'L s u ~3.4 00CUMENTATION 3.5 RECEIVING, STORING AND DISPENSING OF C0ATING MATERIALS
_, . W-S. 6 SPECIAL COATING PROCEDURE
- -18. 7 TOUCH-UP & FINISH C0ATING OF VENDOR APPLIED C0ATINGS 4.0 PROCEDURE FOR COATING 4.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES AND COATING MATERIALS 4.2 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR FINISH C0AT 4.3 PREPARATION OF C0ATING MATERIALS 4.4 APPLICATION OF PRIME AND FINISH COATING 4.5 4.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING HOLD POINTS -;
p( $29 C0 SUPPORTI..G INFORMATION EE h 1 g'
- ~,.
ATTACFME!!TS ,(5 N REFERENCES - , 9
~
, . ,, ; ..g.. . , g. _ ..>...y e ; . :, . .. . :. . . .._;,..,,,u...,,, 3, ..
. .a > . .
?~ -
008 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electiic Station 4 Construction Procsdure DOCUMENT CHAfEE NOTICE tA.'MSER 7 This nctica applies to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195- CCP-30 Revision 10 . This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: Please replace the following pages with the attached: Page 10 of 13 Page 12 of 13
-/
( Reviewed by: Origin f r W bData' Uh) drown /[cotQualityAssurance Data Raview by: Approved by: I # d' 'b '
"*ICDC0 Quality Assurance #
Data OfK-[ C3nstruction Pro;ec: Manager t-a-a Cata GEffective - ll-Cata 85 . l l
. - - - - - -- ---w -r--v &= v g -= '---------------m- - * - ~ m---- .-e- e s W -s-. 's r--'-ere-- *------ -
( . .,
~
.-.. v.,-u.e:-. , , . . i. +
, . . , .y. ....v.... ,. . . .........n.-
? . I JOB 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station . Construction Procadure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER 6 , This notice applies to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195- cro.in Revision in . This change will be incorporatad in the next revision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: Replace the following pages with the attached: Page 8 of 13 Attachment 3 Page 1 of 2 Attachment 3 Page 2 of 2 Reviewed by: Oktr 29 bb Y-I O afown i Root quality Assurance Cata Or1gpator lv Re
- M 11 Appro M by: Data bGeoQ y Assurance
- h. hd&- # 4[-Z 983 -
C5nstruction Project . Manager Qata Acril 20 1983 Effec;1ve Data l
, . . v_....-.. . . ~ . . . , ... -.
- . , _ .......a.....v. s. . . . . - .,,,.
. . . . . .. . .. _ . - . . ~ . . - . - . - . . .
)
l JOB 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station . Sheet 1 of 2 Construction Procadure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER S This notice applies to Construction Procadure No. 35-1195 CCP-30 Revision 10 . This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the precadure. .i Change the procedure as follows: Replace the following page with the attached: Page 11 of 13 1 Reason for change: Additional requirement. Reviewed by:
$nk Gr1ginator
/
Us& H/63 uf Odd 1% pen I!M Data 3rown & Race Quality Assurance Data Re . Approved by: - ' '> p& //Vh ITIGCd Quayi Assurance Data I hd _bu # construe.: ion Pro,1ect Manager
/.-//-S' L Data 1/17/83 iffec:1ve cata 1
mW_ l JWw -- 1 (
-. _. . , , - . . - . --. - , ,_ . e ,, ,, , , . . - - -
-----..y _- - - . . -
, . . . . ..: .. t . . ..,...,.i.:::.a ' t . . ~ . . . ? . . .s. . . . :, .. . ,: . , a: . . . ,
l l 1
- e 1 J08 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station Sheet 1 of 2 Construction Procaeure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER 4 This notics applies to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195. CCP-30 Revision 10 This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure.
Change the procedure as follows: Replace the following page with the attached: Page 11 of 13 Reason for change: Change in requirenent. Reviewed by: Origpter hY lE~lf-$2-Cara drown & Root' Quality Assurance Date l Rev ew ,: . M l/ ' . f. $U Approved by: IUcco Q g Assurance Daca k# , # /?Z/??/cz 12/21/S2 constr0ction Pro 0ec . Manager cata Effective casa 2--.----,.-_.-.w
,,..-my- y- _ w.,-+. , - - - . ,,.m,w-
.%-9., ,-.* ---- - . . - - p, - ---
, - ; c .e , _ .s.c r.t. 2. ; n :.cf .
. , .- . . . + . . ~. c v _ : _ . . . . ., _ .. . ss , ,
. . l JOB 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station .
Sheet 1 of 4
. Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER 3
This notice applies to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195- CCP-30 Revision 1 This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: Replace the following pages with the attached: Page 11 of 13 Page 12 of 13 Page 1 of 1 Attachnent 4 i Reason for change: Additional requirenents 1 Reviewed by:
&.! b h 2 bl - l' b. Yl.EbJ -! U?L pta/ Srown & Root Quarity Kssurance- Da'e Origiytor p Approved by: s w" TUGCO Quali yt surance
/z, b &
Dacs N . /82& ///lff f -$ fL- V W 9l21l82 * ~- Construc1on Project Manager Date Effective Gate
- -~
~
WWm.- , ~
, , . , , ,,7-.~, e +.,.,a,u- - --
,e -n .---a+.~..,--v-~ mw-4o-wn vv- w "^r--'r-v-- .'s--* w-n4=
'-t-- * - - - - w s+--- ~ ~ - -
6
- r. . v n :'< v a <. . . . , .,.n, -
.- : w ... .- . .
- ., e, . . .~-
.a MM3
. \MDEXED 008 35-1195 -
Comanche Peak- Steam Electric Station " DA* Sheet 1 of 2 Construction Procadure '~ DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER 2 This notice applies to Construction Procadura No. 35-1195. CCP-30 Revision 10 This change will be incorporatad in the next revision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: Replace the following page with the attached: Page 6 of 13 Reascn for change: Additional requirement Reviewed by: 777,A uA sfdez tar du d2if Srewn & Root Quailty Assurance Data Crigpator f Approved by: - MGC0 Quality Assurance h4.I C/o/ Data
- h. 8/C-9"M 5/11/82 Construc;1on Pro;ec: Manager Data iffective Oata
\.
,_..._y , . _ . , . ,, ,y., _,.-_p,.,. _ ,, , , , . _ . , . _ , _ _ , . ,
- ' . - . . . . . a . .. . .A:..:
. .u :v.w u. . uu.-. .?
- ., '. ~.-: v=a - .*.~: :u-e m 1 ANM3 INDEXED 008.35-1195 oars Comanche Peak Staam Electric ~ Station Sheet 1 of 2 Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER 1 This notice applies to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195. CCP-30 Revision 10 .
This change will be incorporatad in the next revision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: Replace the following page with the attached: Page 5 of 13 Reason for change: Additional requirements Reviewed by: Originator _ h 2-lb 02 Data A//A' W i*:bbf,'*'7 drown &-Rcot Quality Assurance Oa:a Reviewed by: Approved by: "'A 3 7bi-TUGC0 Quality Assur c 'Date h4m .xm 2/Y-9&_ Construction Pro,:ec . Manager Cata 2/17/82 iff ec:1ve Data I
._, . . . . a .. z: : :. v. . . w. n.t.n x r w .* .. L A : . ~' "e i;. . , ,
PROCEDURE l EFFECTIVE , BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUM8ER ! REVISION DATE l PAGE CPSES
I r .
(. JOB 35-1195 "CCP-30 l 10 1/26/82 l 2 of 13
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE 1.1.1 The purpose of this procedure is to establish the methods by which the prime and finish coats are to be applied to the con-tainment liners and radiation areas in accordance with speci-fication, drawing, and manufacturer's requirements. This pro-cedure may also be used for coating any steel substrate inside the reactor buildings scheduled to receive Carbo Zinc 11 primer and Phenoline 305 finish coat. 1.2 SCOPE 1.2.1 The scope of this procedure covers the surface preparation and coating of Unit 1 and 2 steel substrates inside the reactor
+ buildings and radiation areas scheduled to receive protective
. coatings.
I 1.3 GENERAL DISCUSSION 1.3.1 ' All coating materials covered by this procedure shall be as manu-factured by Carboline Corporation of St. Louis, Missouri. The i coating shaI1 consist of a prime coat of Carbo Zinc 11 with a finish coat of Phenoline 305. To protect the prime coat from prolonged ex-posure, a " seal coat" consisting of approximately one mil. of Pheno-line 305, thinned in accordance with Section 4.4.2.4, may be applied over the prime coat. Prior to finish coating, the seal coat shall be solvent wiped with Phenoline thinner or Xylol. Finish coating shall be applied when convenient prior to completion of the building or
; prior to placement of concrete, equipment, or obstructions which would make finish coating impossible.
In order to maintain traceability on protective coatings applied to shop coated steel cited for installation in the Reactor Building, these items shall be steel stamped with a unique coating code number. The code numbers shll be assigned by QC Paint and applied by craft personnel. Upon division of materials, this unique number will be transferred along with all other unique identifying numbers. w i 2.0 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 2.1 TERMS 2.1.1 Substrate - The uncoated surface to which a coating is applied. e
L
. . - r . . . .c - .. .,, .: v>aa ; ur.w i. u:.. . n.. . w a.c , a.+, . . s. .~ . > .. .:. n , l I
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE SROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER ,fREVISION DATE j PAGE CPSES r JOB 35-1195 1 , CCP-30 10 ; '1/26/82 l 3 of 13 3.0 SPECIAL ITEMS AND OPERATIONS 3.1 QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL 3.1.1 Coating application personnel shall be qualified per previous ex-perience and practical application. In addition, each painter shall have been instructed by the Paint Superintendent or his representa-tive in the use of the products as consistent with Carboline's training procedures, which includes both classroom instruction and a field application demonstration. This shall be verified by com-pleting a form similar to Attachnent 1. This form shall be executed by the Brown & Root Paint Superintendent or his represent-ative. A coating manufacturer's representative will be available for technical supervisio'n upon initial painting effort. Applicators performing work to Attachnent 2 shall be qualified for "Q" coatings when applicable. - 3.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 3.2.1 All appropriate health, safety, and fire protection requirements, pertaining to surface preparation and coating application, shall ( be followed. It shall be the responsibility of the Site Safety Department to establish the frequency of monitoring the coating work. ~ 3.3 INSTRUMENTS AND THEIR USE ^ 3.3.1 The painting Forenan and General Foreman shall have access to and be familiar with the use of all instruments necessary to insure efficiency of coating applications. This shall include
- surface profile comparators, holiday detectors, thermometers, and wet and dry film gauges. Viscosity measuring devices will not be used. Wet film gauges will be randomly used during coating application as an aid to field personnel on Phenoline 305 only.
Readings will be limited to the minimum necessary to control coating thickness. 3.4 DOCUMENTATION 3.4.1 Records shall be maintained on Attachments 1 and 2 listed in Section 5.1. After completion, each form shall be forwarded to the Brown & Root Document Control Center for filing and distri-bution to the various parties as listed on the distribution sheet. i i 9
*w + -- s m..-e.x~-m n wr ,or--,-m,w ~ -v--- ww- m- -~.vw--- -w--or-e n n ~ re nv c n r- w- a -e- v-n,s s--r--w,, r-
}:l - l . . ,, u. ., ~.v vv.:..:. w . w m:a w..~ . ~ L.4 sr L ~-.-- PROCEDURE l EFFECTIVE
' BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER [ REVISION DATE ! PAGE CPSES.
.~ t +
J0B.35-1195 .- i CCP -l 10 i 1/26/82 l 4 of 13 3.5 RECEIVING, STORAGE AlO DISPENSING'0F C0ATING MATERIALS 3.5.1 Receiving and Storage - Upon receipt of a shipment of coating materials, the B&R QC Representative accepting shipment shall be responsible for completing all necessary receiving inspection ; documentation. General receiving procedures shall be in accor- i dance with Brown & Root Construction Procedure CP-CPM 8.1. It shall ' then be segregated from Non "Q" materials and stored in the paint stora 450 ge-building where taperatures 1100 F. Infrequent dips in airwill be maintainin_ed temperature between storage areas 0 as low as 32 F for up to 24 hours are acceptable. Teporary l storage may be required at the receiving warehouse due to receiving or other problems. i 3.5.2 Dispensing - When coating materials are needed, in the field, ; it shall be transferred from the controlled area to a designated temporary storage area or area of intended use in the field. Due to limited shelf-life of coating materials, this shall be done on a "first-in", "first-out" basis. After materials have been partially used from an individual container, the said container
. cannot be resealed and returned to "Q" storage area for later I
use. Containers opened and partially distributed from the "Q" ' paint storage area may be resealed and the remaining contents : used for "Q" painting. With the exception of thinners, the con- I tents from partially used containers shall not be reused after a period of 7 days has elapsed from date of initial opening. , 3.6 SPECIAL COATING PROCEDURE i 3.6.1 When items require special coating not covered under the content ' of this document, the appropriate Project Engineer (Mechanical, Civil . Electrical) shall complete Attachment 2 and transmit it i to the Paint Superintendent. A log of all procedures from '
, Attachment 2 shall be maintained by the Site Coating Engineer. I The following information shall be completed on each procedure.
3.6.2 Each procedure shall be given a unique number. The scope will describe the worki.79 limits of the procedure with detailed i work requirements being listed under the requirements section. i The' approvals section shall have signatures of the following: Project Discipline Engineer (Mechanical, Civil, etc.), QA Manager if coating of item is safety related. TUSI representative ' when required Engineer who prepared document, and a revision ' number and date. Upon completion of the document, distribution , shall be made to all holders of this procedure. 4 e i s 6 1
. . c. . .1 r - :.. .. % .-ax w w n m .aw A-PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES F
J08 35-1195 . 'CCP-30 10 1/26/82 - 5 of 13 3.7 TOUCH-UP AND FINISH C0ATING OF VENDOR APPLIED C0ATINGS 3.7 .1 Prior to touch-up of primer or application of topcoat on vendor coated itens other than pipe hanger support components, an adhesion test shall be performed by the Brown & Root QC Depart . ment. If results are acceptable, work may proceed in accordance with sections 4.4.2.2 through 4.4.'2.9. 3.7.2 The QC Inspector or his representative shall notify the res-ponsible area engineer and/or the Paint Superintendent as soon as possible after receipt of a nonconforming item in need of paint repair to allow time for Attachment 2 preparation and a planned schedule for repair. 4.0 PROCEDURE FOR COATING 4.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES AND C0ATING MATERIALS 4.1.1 Surface Preparation for Primer - Final surface preparation shall not begin unless the temperature of the surface to be blasted and/or power tooled is 5"F above the dew point. If needed, the surface to
. be primed shall then be cleaned of any heavy oil or grease deposits
( in accordance with SSPC-SP-1-63 " Solvent Cleaning". Small amounts of grease or oil deposits may be removed by blast operations. The surface shall then be cleaned by blast, hand or power tool operations to achieve an equivalent of SSPC-SP10-63, "near white" blast cleaning. Although 1-3 mil surface profile is preferred, a minimum of 1 mil. profile is required. After the above surface preparation, the surface to be primed shall be air blasted and/or solvent wiped to remove dust, sand or foreign contaminants from the surface. Air blasting shall not be performed where air-borne contaminants could adhere to tacky paint. Suffi-cient time shall be provided to allow suspended pirticles to . settle before beginning primer application. If rust forms after surface preparation, the rusted area shall be re-cleaned before primer application. Under no case shall a blast, hand, or power tool cleaned surface be exposed for more than 24 hours prior to priming without additional cleaning of the surface. When applying co. tings that will be joined together by a later coating operation, the interface shall be constructed as follows:
- a. Blasting using no border tape -
white metal approximately IV- Quarblast-the 18" beyond the steel to near point which will receive primer. Hold back approximately 12" - 18" from edge of blasted area when' applying primer. CCP-30 Rev. 10 DCN #1 2/17/82 Sheet 2 of 2
. + . . . z ww.@.9.-...uky w - .N-% mms:
3 .e s . ; ,. a r.c . ~ ' 4. : : a w . .
"t . Pit 0CEDURE EFFECTIVE 4 BROWN & It00T, INC. IRSSER REVISION DATE .PAGE-
- p C9sEs JOB 35-1195-CCP-30 10 1/26/82 . 6 of 13
- b. Blast, hand or power tool cleaning using border tape. . Clean the steel to near white metal approximately 3" - 6" beyond
- l.*
the point which will receive primer. Place border tape ! approximately 1" in from edge of cleaned area and prime. When applying seal or finish coat on either of above methods . i hold back approximately 12" - 18" from edge of primer. l 4.1.2 Reoval of weld spatter and othef minor. surface imperfections (not to exceed .031" for containment liners) - If needed, weld ; spatter omitted by others will be removed by Painting Personnel i in accordance with SSPC-SP-2 and SSPC-SP-3. .If it is determined k that surface defects are severe.enough to require later repair,
- the area to be repaired will be blocked out and spot painted l
at a later date. All protrusions and peaks shall be ground to a rounded contour. : i 4.1.3 'If coating removal is required from an area or item which has pre- ! l viously been coated in accordance with this procedure, shadows or : 1 tight residue of primer which may reain in the profile of the pre- 1 i , viously prepared substrate is acceptable. l l
- 4.2 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR FINISH C0AT .
. [
( i ' i 4.2.1 Surface preparation for the finish coat shall consist of the removal, ! j if needed, of any oil or grease. This shall be accomplished by the l a use of a manufacturer recommended cleanser or cleansing method on - i areas that have been seal-coated. On areas where the Carbo Zinc 11 , j primer is exposed, oil and grease will be removed by sand blasting, l
- hand, or power tool grinding, and needle scaling and then by solvent- 1 j wiping the area prior to replacing the primer. Power tool grinding !
4 and needle scaling should be equivalent to a near white blast SP-10 ! j specification with no size limitation as long as the millage require-
- ments are obtained. l 1
4.2.2 The ambient taperature and relative humidity shall be measured to ! determine the dew point taperature. Phenoline 305 finish8coat shall be applied unless the substrate temperature is more than 5 F above the . dow point. ! !- I 4 4.3 PREPARATION OF COATING MATERIALS i i 4.3.1 Primer - The primer, Carbo Zinc 11, is packaged in a two component i kit consisting of a base and zinc filler. First the base shall be - i thoroughly mixed. Zinc filler shall then be added under constant i agitation and mixed until free of lumps. Partial mixes shall be mixed j by weight in a proportion of 10 parts base to 22 parts zinc filler 1- using a suitable scale to achieve a plus or minus 2 percent accuracy. i The mixture shall then be strained through a 30-mesh screen. Viscosity shall be controlled by adding thinner, as required, but shall not exceed i two quarts of thinner per gallon of Carbo -Zinc 11. Pot life of CZ 11 l shall be as shown in Attachnent 4. P CCP-30 Rev. 10 DCN #2 5/11/82_- Sheet 2 of 2 j .
1 p: c , . .w . , . ~ ... .. , . . - =.... 4.a u c '
~ ^ ~ ' '
~<ww ' j
. . l l
PROCEDURE ! EFFECTIVE ! BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION-l DATE ! PAGE i I CPSES ,' I -
. JOB 35-1195 :
CCP-30 [ 10 ; 1/26/82 l 7 of 13 4.3.2 Finish Coat - The finish coat, Phenoline 305, is packaged in a two component kit consisting of Phenoline 305 base Part A, and a Phencline catalyst, Part B. Mixes are made by combining and thoroughly mixing the base and satalyst. Partial mixes may be made by combining, in a ratio by volume, four parts base to one part catalyst. Viscosity shall be controlled by adding thinner, as required, but shall not exceed two quarts of thinner per gallon of Phenoline 305. Pot life of Phenoline 305 shall be shown on Attachnent 4. 4.4 APPLICATION OF PRIME AND FINISH COATING 4.4.1 Prime Coat 4.4.1.1 Coating material shall be applied using conventional spray equip-ment with agitated pressure pots having a maximum hose length of 75 feet. Care must be taken to assure that air and material pressures are adjusted to compensate the additional length of hose from 50' to 75' in length. The primer shall be allowed to become tack free before start of other construction operations which could create contamination problems. Any runs or sags having (' a detrimental effect on the coating system shall be removed and re-paired. The following application parameters shall also be followed:
- 1. Normal conditions of ambient and surface temperature shall be 40" - 95 0F and 400 - 1100F respectively;0however. . primer 0
may be applied within an ambient rgnge of 0 - 130 F and a sur-face temparature range of 00 - 200 F. Carbo-Zinc 11 may be thinned up to 2 quarts per gallon for application; however, when using higher thinning levels at or below nonnal tem-perature range, care must be taken to obtain proper film build. Above 850F it is advisable to use up to 2 quarts per gallon to minimize dry spray. In no case shall carbo-line limits be exceeded.
- 2. Humidity values vary from 10 to 95% however, coating shall not be applied to a wet or damp surface.
- 3. Thickness of prime coat shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils and a maximum of 4.5 mils. Minimum and maximum spot
. test values shall be 1.5 and 5.5 mils respectively. t .
- 4. A double regulated pot having an adequate air volume supply shall be used.
- 5. As a guide, coating material may be applied using a 50% over-l lap with sach pass while holding a gun 8-10 inches from the l surface. Cross hatch application is permissible. '
l
1
. s .: ... . . : '. . . :a. a. . w.i n . w .a. ~ ~ -m ..... < s e.:7 . .
1 . . 5 ' PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE SROWN & ROOT, INC. MJMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES
.7..
J08'35-1195 'CCP;30 10 1/26/82 8/of 13 -
- 6. Carbo Zinc 11 is sufficiently cured for ;opcoat wnen cne .
coating may be burnished rather than removed when rubbed with the flat portion of a smooth edged coin such as a nickl e. (Minor amounts of zire dust may be recoved during cure verification, however, a burnished surface must be achieved). Attachment 3 may be utilized as general guide . lines for cure to topcoat time of CZ-11 above 25% relative humidity. If required, the cure of carbo zinc II may be accelerated by the use of water spray, however, a minimu.a of one hour must elapse between application of coating and water spray. Below 25% relative humidity, water curing is recommended to obtain the desired cure. Water utilized in co.njunction with water curing shall have a PH factor from 5 to 9. Application of water spray for curing purposes may-be as often as necessary to obtain the proper cure. 4.4.1.2 Recoating of Carbo Zinc 11 Primer - Prior to recoating, if no major defects per section 4.4.2.9 are present, the entire primed surface to be recoated shall be wiped with clean rags moistened with Carboline Thinner #33. Wiping shall continue until no appreciable discoloration is noticed on the r:gs. Carbo Zinc 11 shall then be thinned by using two quarts Carboline NO. 33 per ' gallon mix. This will be applied to achieve a 2.0 - 4.5 mils - total DFT. Only two recoats may be applied. Special attention should be given to spray application and dry film thickness when using a 50% mix. The primed surface shall not be recoated until cured per section 4.4.1.1.6.
- 4.4.1.3 Repair of Sags and Runs - Sags or runs in excess of 5.5 mils will
- be adraded with an aluminum screen or sandpaper to 2.0 to 5.5 mils; Sags or runs 5.5 mils or less which show no evidence of mud-cracking will not be repaired. If coating surface is satis-factory after abrading, then finish coat may be applied; however, if coating surface is unsatisfactory, blast, hand abrade or power i
tool ' grind to near white metal is required and primer coat re-applied. ! A satisfactory coating is considered one having no mud-cracking to i the metal surface as visible to the unaided eye. 1 4.4.1.4 Brush touch-up painting shall be done on the prime coat in accor-dance with the following: i Prime Coat: i
- 1. Carboline Application Instruction (Carbo Zinc 11)
Bulletin - October 76-N.
- 2. Carboline Product Data Sheet (Carbo Zinc 11)
Bulletin - October 76-N. Brush touch-up allowed on areas one square foot or less.
~ _ _
CCP-30 Rev. 10 DCN #6 4/29/83 Sheet 2 of 4
' ~ ' -
- . . .s ~~
7:; u . . , . . . +. . .. . .... :v. ~ o - - --- I ' PROCEDURE ! EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER f REVISION i OATE ; PAGE i ' CPSES _,- t 20B 35-1195 . CCP-30 l 10 i 1/26/82 j 9 of 13 4.4.1.5 Embedded foreign particles shall be renoved by abrading, if low millage or major defects result, recoat or repair per section 4.4.1.2 or section 4.4.2.9. , 4.4.1.6 Treatment of Rust Stains - Renove residue, though not neces-sarily the stain, with bristle brush and water or Carboline Thinner #33. Allow to dry thoroughly. 4.4.1.7 Coating Interface - Refer to Section 4.4.3.0 for coating interfacing. 4.4.2 Finish Coat 4.4.2.1 Finish coating shall be applied using conventional, airless, brush or roller. Weld seams, edges and other sharp geometrical discontinuities may receive an initial coat of 1-2 mils finish coating thinned by using two quarts Phenoline Thinner per each gallon kit of Phenoline 305. To aid in continuity at edges, edges may be
" striped" with Phenoline unthinned instead of the 50% mixture as stated above. In either " striping" or initial coating of edges, I welds, etc., time should be allotted for the coating to harden sufficiently to maintain a " sealing" effect prior to continuing coating operations. The initial coating of edges, striping, etc., as stated above, shall be considered part of the total
- initial finish coating ootration. The material shall be allowed
. to become tack free before any other construction operations ! proceed which could create contamination problans by dust or other foreign matter. A continuity check shall be performed in - accordance with NACE T-6F-3 Condition "C". No gross discontinuities are acceptable such as holidays, voids, skips, bubbles, and misses. Any runs or sags having a detrimental effect on the coating system shall be renoved and repaired. The following application parameters i shall govern:
- 1. The permissible range of surface and ambient tenperature for application shall be 500 - 120 0F. Temperature may rise above 1200 F after material has become " tack free". Phenoline 305 may be thinned up to 2 quarts of Phenoline Thinner per gallon mix. The ratio of thinner to Phenoline will be that which gives the best workable mix, i.e. , usually advantageous to use more thinner at lower tenperatures.
- 2. Minimum and maximum values of relative humidity shall be 0% and 85% respectively.
- 3. As a guide, coating material shall be applied using a 50% over-lap with each pass while holding the gun 8-10 inches from the surface.
~
1 1 l
., .- . . ~ ~ . . , . -. .--s l .' j
(: ' PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE l BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE l CPSE3 ,_
. JOS 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 10 of 13 g
- 4. Curing and time to recoat Phenoline 305 shall be as shown below:
Between Coats Temperature OF Final Cure 72 hours 50 - 59 12 days 36 hours 60 - 74 8 days 18 hours 75 - 89 4 days 12 hours 90 and above 2 days
- 5. Phenoline thinned at 50% and applied as a seal coat may be recoated after 4 hours of cure at or above 750F.
- 6. Tack free shall be defined as the extent of cure at which foreign contaminants will not adhere to the coating.
- 7. The total coating system shall have a dry film thickness range of 7 to 11 mils, with a minimum spot check of 7 mils and a maximum spot check of 11.5 mils.
4.4.2.2 Repair of Runs and Sags - Runs and sags will be abraded until the DFT of the Phenoline 305 is within 1.9 - 4.5 mils. If cracks are visible, then runs and sags will be removed to primer by power tool grinding fallowed by solvent wiping. If no cracking ' occurs, top coat will be considered acceptable. Area will be recoated as outlined in the Repair of Pinholes and Discontinuities (Section 4.4.2.4). 4.4.2.3 Repair of Embedded Foreign Particles - Foreign particles shall be removed by abrading and then recoated as outlined in the repair of pinholes and discontinuities. Recoating shall not be performed until cure times stated in Section 4.4.2.1(4) have been satisfied. 4.4.2.4 Repair of Pinholes and Discontinuities - L'oose particles shall be removed by brushing or vacuum r compressed air. The affected area shall be solvent wiped with Phenoline 305 Thinner or xylol. Pinholes and small discontinuities may be repaired at the time of final inspection without a later reinspection of the repair. If the repair area requires recoating, recoat the area with Phenoline 305 thinned 50%. Recoated areas require cure to final inspection time per section 4.5.1. 4.4.2.5 Repair of Scratches and Damaged Areas - Any scratches or damaged areas will be abraded until loosely adherent particles are re-mov ed. The avea shall then be solvent wiped (Carboline thinner
#33 for primer, Carboline Phenoline thinner or xylol for topcoat) and repaired with appropriate coating, i.e. , Phenoline 305 if damage is considered a minor defect per section 4.4.2.8 and Carbo Zinc 11 and Phenoline 305 if damaged area is considered a major defect per section 4.4.2.9. All edges of existing coating around the perimeter of the cleaned area shall be " feathered" back a sufficient distance ot ensure a smooth blend with existing coating.
Thickness shall be as required for the pertinent coating. CCP-30 Rev. 10 DCN #7 MC --__- - 6/ 11/83 fage 2 of 3
] . r.:; xm: ..-'.:- . .. +w~ ..~ a.. -:.e.w .a M & ~ ~ ~ u ~. m . w I
PRCCEDURE EFFECTIVE ! BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER fREVISION DATE j PAGE-
-( cpsgg . . .
J08 35-1195 [ f CCP-30 # 10 i 1/26/82 l 11 of 13 4.4.2.6 Brush touch-up painting shall be done on the finish coat in accordance with the following:
- 1. Carboline Application Instruction (Phenoline 305) Bulletin i 775. ,
- 2. Carbo 11ne Product Data Sheet- (Phenoline 305 Primer and Finish) ~
Bulletin 473. Brush touch-up and complete application is
; allowed with no area restrictions. >
L 4.4.2.7 Treatment of Rust Stains - If surface is contaminated with rust
- stains or minute metallic particles, then surface shall be pre-pared by solvent wiping with Phenoline 305 Thinner or xylol and overcoating with a coat of Phenoline 305 prepared in accordance ,
with Section 4.4.2.4. 4.4.2.8 Repair of Topcoat and/or CZ 11 Minor Defects - (Minor defects are defined as an area, either circular or linear, in which a i diameter circle could not be completely inscribed at any point along the entire length.) Blast or abrade, by machine or hand, the Pheno-line 305 finish surrounding the damaged area _and clean any exposed
! s steel to ensure contaminant free surface.- Solvent wipe the sur- -
l rounding 305 finish with Carboline's Phenoline Thinner or xylol. .
! Spray or brush Phenoline 305 finish at approximately 4 mil DFT over ! the damaged area. Overlap onto the surrounding coating a sufficient ';
amount to insure a smooth and :ontinuous topcoat system. ! 4.4.2.9 Repair of Topcoat and/or CZ 11 Major Defects - (Major defects are
; defined as an area, either circular or linear, in which a h"
! diameter circle could be completely inscribed at any point or along
- the entire length.) Spot blast or abrade, machine or hand, the i damaged area. Power tool or hand abrading must be very thorough in i
order to prepare the surface for Carbo Zinc 11 touch-up. The result- , j- ing surface preparation shall be equivalent to a near white SP-10 ' Specification. A surface roughness equivalent to a minimum of one mil blast profile shall be obtained. l l i 4.4.3.0 Coating Interface - At coating interface for finish and/or primer j coat, the existing coating shall be " feathered back" a sufficient distance to ensure a smooth final coating sytem. When interfacing the 305/CZ11 system and the 305/D6 system, the interface of the two j primers shall be no greater than ih" in width. . 4.4.3.1 Cure of Minor Topcoat Re* pair - Minor defects, as defined in Section 4.4.2.8, which are noted in the topcoat and repaired, may be in-spected for final acceptance after cure to recoat time as stated in Section 4.4.2.1(4) has been satisfied. Full cure to topcoat repairs shall be satisfied prior to placement into service. CCP-30 Rey, 10 DCN f5 1/17/83 Sheet 2 of 2
..+,
g ..
' " , a. .
's
', =- - . , . ...
[' ~ 1 EFFECTIVE
, _ PROCEDURE 1 BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER ,
REVISION DATE PAGE . CPSES t -
,~
12 of 13
' JOB 35-1195
.' - ' CCP-30 10 1/26/82 4.5 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4.5.1 Final accsptance inspectfon may be performed after a minimum . topcoat cure of 24 hours and cure for recoat time as state in section 4.4.2.1 paragraph 4 is satisfied. '
After final inspection ahd resolution of all discrepancies are completed the QC inspector shall document the final acceptance by completing and signing the final- acceptance record. A copy will then be transmitted to the B&R Paint Superintendent as soon as possible after final accept-ance is made. 4.6 HOLD POINTS 4.6.1 Onsite receipt of coating materials. 4.6.2 Substrates before and following surface preparation. Mixing and preparation of coating material for application.
~
4.6.3 4.6.4 Film characteristics after drying and curing. 4.6.5 Control of ambient condit' ions and surface temperatures during all phases of the coating work. I 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 ATTACHMENTS
- 1. Painter Qualification Record
- 2. Special Coating Procedure
- 3. CZ 11 Cure to Topcoat Time
- 4. Pot Life CZ 11 and Phenoline 305
5.2 REFERENCES
- 1. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-SS-14
" Containment Steel Liner", Latest Revision ,
- 2. Steel Structures Paint Council, Volume 2, Second Edition
- 3. Carboline Corporation " Application Instruction",
October 76-N Revision and Bulletin Number 775 - data sheets October 76-N Revision and 473, Latest Revision
- 4. ANSI N 101.2,
" Protective Coatings (Paints) for Light Water Nuclear .
Reactor Containment Facilities"
- 5. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-AS-31,
" Protective Coatings", Latest Revision l
- &w CCP-30 Rev 10 DCN #7 b 6/11/83 Page 3 of 3
,y , ,w -
-w ,
~ . . . .. . - -- . . . . . . . . , . . . . . _. . .
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES 7-JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 13 of 13
- 6. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-MS-101,
" Equipment Erection". Latest Revision
- 7. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-MS-438,
" Nuclear Piping", Latest Revision
- 8. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-MS-448, "Non-Nuclear Piping"
- 9. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-MS-100,
" Piping Erection"
- 10. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-SS-17
" Miscellaneous Steel", Latest Revision
( _ 4 1 l l l l
-s
.a s
. , = - . _ , _ , _ , _ , . , _ ,
y a; . n:<.: .: ; ,- *.y ~~ ; ..
, , , , . ._ .;. , :. p; . . . u . ,,,: a. a ,.. u. , :,
...n..,
, . _ . . . _ . - _ . _ . . . . .. __ _ .. . _ . z . ___ ._ : : .a. . . . . ..s .. .. ... .. . . . .
=
l 5 PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE ftMBER REVISION DATE PAGE p ~ BROWN & ROOT .INC. CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 1 of i l it ATTACHMENT 1 BROWN & ROOT, INC. COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION Painter Qualification Record GENERAL DATA Date Report Number TECHNICAL DATA j Name of Painter Sumary of Field Experience i Experience with Following Product Types . Application Test for Specified substrate i Additional Qualifications (School) l Signature Applicator's Field Supervisor Distribution: Painting Supt. Q.C. Depart:nent Tugco QA Vault (Original)._
- w. '
, .;, ac n .: ::2 .,
.7
. .. :._.e. 4. - e .. > u. a, . - , ,
. . .. .s. ;. _... . . . . . .:_ w -
, . u . _ .... . -. . J. a
. 1 PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE SROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE .
-g, CPSES j JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 1 of 2 il "Q" Coating ATTACHMENT 2 Sheet of Procedure #
"Non-Q" Coating Rev. Date SPECIAL COATING PROCEDURE NO.
SCOPE' REQUIREMENTS:
. (.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS APPROVALS
% PDE QA/QC l
I TUSI I ENGINEER i V- REV. DATE
=-----
- g. e-. e q n.p yg- -w.*,ynm.- 9._,y r-m-~ cy-cy y.--- e.-1--y*-,---o-w"g. gw
,r,p-q-w-wp-~y-e g -ytw.hwaegg 9 ,. -
9 y-ggg ,. .w.* g- y-pa. g- ,gt-w .-yve * -vm e -
. ; o. . . w.: .t .:. :.: - u- : : - .;.
>. a: .y . . :2 na a v ' - - -- - u.
.--- . . . - - . . ~ . . . - --- -- :---- w' -- -- - .-- -- - -
4 PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. MjMBER REVISION DATE , PAGE
- c. -
CPSE3 JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 - 2 of 2 Sheet of ATTACHMENT 2 (Continued) Procedure # Rev. Date REQUIREMENTS (Continued) f a d f . s_. h O e e I T 6 m m +e w- v,~--- w--,-, v,, ---ne -~n--v--ve - , - , , , , - - - - , , ..,,w --,-m.-- -a.,,--.--,,m - --w-- -,-
- . . . : .. . a.c -
.. . . x. . .. u . .- . : . g v. na>'.
.-....-:-....... . . . . . --.. . . ~ . K : ~ ! - .. . -- - -. -- . . -- -
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE
.c BROWN & RDOT, INC. lW BER REVISION DATE PAGE
'CPSES !
JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 1of 2 Attachment 3 CZ-11 CURE TO TOPCOAT TIME 25-50% R. H.
.M - .
so- . ite , in-E o E o iw i- : ~ o-- in . . . M g me- - t
- u. <
i o - w_ ! w T 1 2 s2 96 l (t- -. d ! l u_ .
; i e u-4 n--
V M - . I is - i
< i
- o
- i. ... ., ,. .,. ,. .,. ., ,. , ,
o lo se :n w Ja La 7o m to .es TEMPERATURE CCP-30 Rev. 10 DCN #6 4/29/83 Sheet 3 of 4
- <,..-,.ua., a. -
. ....-_...---..:.. . . . - . - . . - - . . . . ..,;. a'.-...a . . =. - - a .--- . . . . .
r PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE SROWN. & RO'JT, INC. MNSER REVISION DATE PAGE
'e -
CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/83 2 of 2 ATTACHMENT 3 CZ-11 CURE TO TOPCOAT TIME 50-100% R.H. W. . m.. t1 - * !
~
l #
- n. e 6
u L o 6 . a. o 1 T
>= !
w Al i h ) , x2 . 4 y -.... .. is - . !, 4 . so w v se to a n o e M l C TEMPERATURE F
~
i f CCP-30 Rey. 10 DCN #6 4/29/23 Sheet 4 of 4
Y:=,..:m:. x. a : .,a.c.:: u . i: .. , . . ;.y . . = .ac .:4m i.u _
... ...... . . , . . . . . , . - . . . . . . . . . . - . - : . .: ..: . - . . . . . - . . . . --.....-....:.--.u-PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. MjMBER REVISION DATE PAGE F ._ . . CPSES
" JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 1 of 1 ATTACINENT 4 POT LIFE - CZ 11 8 Hours Max. Pot Life
%s. _
%. a .
250 - - I nt- - " - ou l..... ...l... ........l. . .. ......I..... ....I gs fS*r y loS*! side ~l'35 POT LIFE PHENOLINE.305 .
~
TEMPERATURE (OF ) UNTHINNED THINNED-50%
~
50 - 54 10 hrs 24 hrs 55 - 59 7 hrs 24 hrs 60 - 64 4 hrs 24 hrs
+
65 - 69 314 hrs 24 hrs 70 - 74 2 hrs 24 hrs 75 - 79 1h hrs 24 hrs 80 - 84 1 hrs 24 hrs 85 - 89 1 hrs 24 hrs 90 - 95 1 hr 24 hrs '
- Pot life for coatings thinned up to but not including max. amount of thinner allowed, use pot life for unthinned material.
For spray application, not life as stated above is recommended
; maximum times and should be utilized for a basis for coating usage time; however, actual pot life may be longer. If coating when tamperature is above.95uF, or if pot life as stated above has been exceeded, the actual pot life ends when proper atomization and spraying becomes difficult and the coating loses body and begins to sag. When utilizing other than spray application methods, pot life shall be as stated in the above table.
Md CCP-30 Rev. 10 DCN #3
, 9/21/82 Sheet 4of4
-- , ,, .*, . -- . - , . ,_.,-e
._ .p . . . .a . .: .~ . . , z. .u .: w. r. . . . ;.- . , ~ . . - .
I
. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER ,! REVISION DATE ! PAGE CPSES '
JOB 35-U 95 . CCP-30 l 10 i 1/2982 l 5 of 13 3.7 TOUCH-UP AND F: <'ISH C0ATING Of VENDOR APPLIED C0ATINGS 3.7.1 Prior to touch-up of primer or application of topcoat on vendor coated items other than pipe hanger support components, an adhesion test shall be performed by the Bro,<n & Root QC Depart-ment. If results are acceptable, work may proceed in accordance with sections 4.4.2.2 through 4.4.2.9. 3.7.2 The QC Inspector or his representative shall notify the res-ponsible area engineer and/or the Paint Superintendent as soon as possible after receipt of a nonconforming item in med of paint repair to allow time for Attachment 2 preparation and a planned schedule for repair. 4.0 PROCEDURE FOR COATING 4.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES AND C0ATING MATERIALS 4.1.1 Surface Preparation for Primer - Final surface preparation shall not begin unless the temperature of the surface to be blasted is SoF above the dew point. If needed, the surface to be primed shall then be cleaned of any heavy oil or grease deposits in accordance with SSPC-SP-1-63 " Solvent Cleaning". Small- arounts of grease or oil deposits may be removed by blast h operations. The surface shall then be eleaned by blast, hand or o power tool operations to achieve an equivalent of SSPC-SP10-63, q "near white" blast cleaning. Although 1-3 mil. surface profile is preferred, a minimum of 1 mil. profile is. required. After the
$ above surface preparation, the surface to be primed shall be air blasted and/or solvent wiped to remove dust, sand or foreign contaminants from the surface. Air blasting shall not be performed where air-borne contaminants could adhere to tacky paint. Suffi-i cient time shall be provided to allow suspended particles to settle before beginning primer application. If rust forms after i surface preparation, the rusted area shall be re-cleaned before primer application. Under no case shall a blast, hand, or power N tool cleaned surface be exposed for more than 24 hours prior to priming without additional cleaning of the surface. When applying l kg coatings that will be joined together by a later coating operation, the interface shall be constructed as follows:
- a. Blasting using no border tape - Overblast the steel to near white metal approximately 12" - 18" beyond the point which will receive primer. Hold back approximately 12" - 18" from edge of blasted area when applying primer, u\-
r
, e,,,s - - . , ,
. . :. . <,a , , : .t. .. . - : :
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES ,_ l ,
' l JOB 35-1195 l CCP-30 10 1/26/82 12 of 13 4.5 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4.5.1 After coating system cure, final inspection, and resolution of j all discrepancies is completed, the QC Inspector shall document !
the final acceptance by completing and signing the final accept- 1 ance record and will transmit a copy of this record to the B&R Paint Superintendent as soon as possible after final acceptance ( 4.6 is made. HOLD POINTS 4.6.1 Onsite receipt or coating materials. 4.6.2 Substrates before and following surface preparation. 4.6.3 Mixing and preparation of coating material for application. 4.6.4 Film characteristics after drying and curing. 4.6.5 Control of ambient conditions and surface temperatures during all phases of the coating work. 0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION ,q e .3 zi ATTACHMENTS E t'
- 1. Painter Qualification Record b 7 2. Special Coating Procedure
- 3. CZ 11 Cure to Topcoat Time n 4. Pat Life CZ 11 and Phenoline 305
5.2 REFERENCES
- 1. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-SS-14,
" Containment Steel Liner", Latest Revision
- 2. Steel Structures Paint Council, Volume 2 Second Edition i
- 3. Carboline Corporation " Application Instructions",
October 76-N Revision and Bulletin Number 775 - data sheets October 76-N Revision and 473, Latest Revision
- 4. ANSI N 101.2,
" Protective Coatings (Paints) for Light Water Nuclear Reactor Containment Facilities" l
- 5. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-AS-31,
" Protective Coatings", Latest Revision l mw CCP-30 Rey, 10 DCN #3 9/21/82 Sheet 3 of 4
s: :a a-, x . . ~ . u ~ n.a.=.n., u ,. . c::n... : , .: . .. i
' ~ '
. PROCEDURE ! EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER ; REVISION ! .DATE i PAGE
; o
.. CPSES e .
JOB 35-1195 j CCP-30 l 10 i 1/26/82 i 10 of 13 l
- 4. Curing and time to recoat Phenoline 305 shall be as shown below: *
, Between Coats Temperature OF Final Cure 72 hours 50 - 59 12 days ! 36 hours 60 - 74 8 days j 18 hours 75 - 89 4 days 12 hours 90 and above 2 days l S. Phenoline thinned at 50% and applied as a seal coat may be recoated after 4 hours of cure at or above 750F.
- 6. Tack free shall be defined as the extent of cure at which foreign contaminants will not adhere to the coating.
- 7. The total coating system shall have a dry film thickness range of 7 to 11 mils, with a minimum spot check of 7 mils and a maximum spot check of 11.5 mils.
4.4.2.2 Repair of Runs and Sags - Runs and sags will be abraded until the DFT of the Phenoline 305 is within 1.9 - 4.5 mils. If cracks are visible, then runs and sags will be removed to primer by power tool grinding followed by solvent wiping. If no cracking
-('- occurs, top coat will be considered acceptable. Araa will be recoated as outlined in the Repair of Pinholes and Discontinuities (Section 4.4.2.4).
4.4.2.3 Repair of Embedded Foreign Particles - Foreign particles shall be removed by abrading and then recoated as outlined in the repair of pinholes and discontinuities. Reccating shall not be performed until cure times stated in Section 4.4.2.1(4) have been satisfied. 4.4.2.4 Repair of Pinholes and Discontinuities - Loose particles shall be removed by brushing or vacuum. The entire area shall then be solvent wiped using Phenoline 305 Thinner or xylol and re-coated using thinned down Phenoline 305 consisting of two quarts Phenoline Thinner per each gallon kit of Phenoline 305 applied at approximatel (See Section 4.4.2.1(4) for re-l coating time.) y 1-2 mils DFT. 4.4.2.5 Repair of Scratches and Damaged Areas - Any scratches or damaged areas will be abraded until loosely adherer.c particles are re- , moved. The area shall then be solvent wiped (Carboline thinner i
#33 for primer, Carboline Phenoline thinner or xylol for topcoat) and repaired with appropriate coating, i.e. , Phenoline 305 if i damage is considered a minor defect per section 4.4.2.8 and Carbo I
Zinc 11 and Phenoline 305 if damaged area is considered a major l l defect per section 4.4.2.9. All edges of existing coating around l l the perimeter of the cleaned area shall be " feathered" back a l l sufficient distance to ensure a smooth blend with existing coating. l j Thickness siiall be as required for the pertinent coating. Y
. . . , m. s .; ;. a wa . . -
..u m e . w:- = ~- a . .=.-
. PROCEDURE ' l EFFECTIVE ,
BROWN & ROOT, INC. . NUMBER ! REVISION DATE i PAGE-I ' CPSES i
^ f
-J08.35-1195 -
l CCR-30 l 10 j 1/26/82 l 6 of'13
- b. Blast, hand or power tool cleaning using border tape - Clean the steel to near white metal approximately 3" - 6" beyond the point which will receive primer. Place border tape i aporoximately 1" in from edge of cleaned area and prime.
When applying seal or finish coat on either of above methods hold back approximately 12" - 18" from edge of primer. 4.1.2 Renoval of weld spatter and other minor surface imperfections (not to exceed .031" for containment liners) - If needed, weld spatter omitted by others will be removed by Painting Personnel in accordance with SSPC-SP-2 and SSPC-SP-3. If it is determined that surface defects are severe enough to requ. ire later repair,
~
g the area to be rapaired will be blocked out and spot painted y at a later date. All protrusions and peaks shall be ground g to a rounded contour. L 4.2 SURFACE PREPARATION FOR FINISH COAT 4.2.1 Surface preparation for the finish coat shall consist of the 6 removal, if needed, of any oil or grease. . This shall be ac-i % complished by use of a manufacturer reconmended cleanser or (- p g c' .ansing method on areas that have been seal-coated. On areas where the Carbo Zinc 11 primer is exposed, oil and grease will
, be ramoved by sand blasting, hand, or power tool grinding, and needle scaling and then by solvent wiping the area prior. to ra-placing the primer. Power tool grinding and needle scaling C
i- ]- sPould be equivalent to a near white blast SP-10 specification with no size limitation as long as the millage requirenents are
- 'WG obtained.
4.2.2 The ambient temperature and relative humidity shall be measured
"" - ]' to determine the dew point temperature. Phenoline 305. finish
^
! coat shall not be applied unless the substrate temperature is more than 50 F above the dew point.
4.3 PREPARATION OF C0ATING MATERIALS 4.3.1 Primer - The primer, Carbo Zinc 11, is packaged in a two component 1 kit consisting of a base and zinc filler. First the base shall be thoroughly mixed. Zinc filler shall then be added under constant agitation and mixed until free of lumps. Partial mixes , shall be mixed by weight in a proportion of 10 parts base to
- 22 parts zine filler using a suitable scale to achieve a plus or minus 2 percent accuracy. The mixture shall then be strained 1 through a 30-mesh screen. Viscosity shall be controlled by j adding thinner, as required, tut shall not exceed two quarts of thinner per gallon of Carbo Zinc 11. Pot life of CZ 11 shall be as shown on Attachnent 4.
r l
. _ _ _ _ _ . . . _ . _ , _ . . . _ . . , . . . . _ - , . , _ _ _ . . _ _~.._.,_,.__.__.____.# __
,.2u:. x n s. v.... , ., ...n. .
.~.c.; . c . :a... .- c . .
! EFFECTIVE PROCEDURE l BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER i RWISION l DATE !
PAGE CPSES ,' JOB 35-1195 ; ; 8 of 13 CCP-30 10 i1/26/82 i
- 6. Cure time before topcoat shall be in accordance with
- Attachment 3 and the following: Carbo Zinc 11 is sufficiently cured for topcoat when the coating may be burnished rather than removed when rubbed with the flat portion of a smooth edged coin such as a nickel. This amount of cure would equal or exceed the amount of cure that is achieved by the graphs in attachment 3. If re-
@ quired, the cure of Carbo Zinc 11 may be accelerated by use of water spray; however, a minimum of one hour must
.g& elapse between application of coating and water spray, d Water used in accelerated curing shall be clean water with d a pH range of 5-9. Application of water spray may be as Q often as necessary to obtain the desired cure.
J ( 4.4.1.2 Recoating of Carbo Zinc 11 Primer - Prior to recoating, if no major defects per section 4.4.2.9 are present, the entire primed surface to be recoated shall be wiped with clean rags moistened g with Carboline Thinner #33. Wiping shall continue until no L appreciable discoloration is noticed on the rags. Carbo Zinc 11 shall then be thinned by using two quarts Carboline No. 33 per c gallon mix. This will be applied to achieve a 2.0 - 4.5 mils s total DFT. Only two recoats may be applied. Special attention should be given to spray application and dry film thickness when using a 50% mix. The primed surface shall not be recoated until cured per section 4.4.1.1.6. 4.4.1.3 Repair of Sags and Runs - Sags or runs in excess of 5.5 mils will be abraded with an aluminum screen or sandpaper to 2.0 to 5.5 mils. Sags or runs 5.5 mils or less which show no evidence of mud-cracking will not be rapaired. If coating surface is satis-factory after abrading, then finish coat may be applied; however, if coating surface is unsatisfactory, blast, hand abrade or power tool grind to near white metal is required and primer coat re-applied. A satisfactory coating is considered one having no mud-cracking to the metal surface as visible to the unaided eye. 4.4.1.4 Brush touch-up painting shall be done on the prime coat in accor-dance with the following: Prime Coat:
- 1. Carboline Application Instruction (Carbo Zinc 11)
Bulletin - October 76-N.
- 2. Carboline Product Data Sheet (Carbo Zinc 11)
Bulletin - October 76-N. Brush touch-up allowed o.n areas one square foot or less. p g
< c h
n 8
. Eu
=&
n.m v.. . ,t.,,, -u......= .a .
- - ,.c:,- w ;_ ~., -+ a.. . . -
- ~
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUM8ER REVISION DATE PAGE
-CPSES
' JOB ;35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 1 of 2 ATTACleENT 3 CZ-11 CURE TO TOPCOAT TIME 25-50% R.H.
\
M-
\. Broken Line range applicator 14 -
\ may rely entirely on coin test.
ite -
\
148 -
,W \ .
I '
\
i n -. '
\
8 5 E in- \ R : g E * . w . j v (b ' l
$ g _'
eo ,_ E n-ON - 19 , i n- < l l l' 'g l' 'l' g' g- g g- 4 - 3 0 10 30 % "O $0 1,e 70 10 90 40
-- TEMPERATURE
, M.P 4
..u.:.... .~. .....a.: e. - : w . - - ~ ~ - - ~ + * ~~-'~'~'"'""'^
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 45-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 2 of 2 ATTACHMENT 3 CZ-11 CURE TO TOPCOAT TIME 50-100% R.H. Broken line range applicatcr may rely entirely on coin test.
\
s18 -- \
. \
'a -
\
\
. \
- \
11 ,
. \.
- \
i n .:
. \
6 : M o G o-
\
g a
>=
ce 4; .
\ ,
. 6 :
\
3 1- k 2 . . . A y_ _ . . . . . - - --. d as _ j -.- -.. .. _ ... _ . . _. ... _ .. . .
.i. ,,- , , ; .,
,e se w to w a .o 4 to /**
O TEMPERATURE F
. . w . - . . w. . n , , , .: , e.a . : .. .a . . w. . w .. ..a PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES I
-JOB ~35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 11 of 13 4.4.2.6 Brush touch-up painting shall be done on the finish coat in.
accordance with the following:
- 1. Carboline Application Instruction (Phenoline 305) Bulletin 775.
- 2. Carboline Product Data Sheet (Phenoline 305 Primer and Finish)
Bulletin 473. Brush touch-up and complete application is allowed with no area restrictions. 4.4.2.7 Treatment of Rust Stains - If surface is contaminated with rust stains or minute metallic particles, then surface shall be pre-g pared by solvent wiping with Phenoline 305 Thinner or xylol and overcoating with a coat of Phenoline 305 prepared in accordance g with Section 4.4.2.4. q 4.4.2.8 Repair of Topcoat and/or CZ 11 Minor Defects - (Minor defects are defined as an area, either circular or linear, in which a h" 4 diameter circle could not be completely inscribed at any point along the entire length.) Blast or abrade, by machine or hand, the Pheno- { . line 306 finish surrounding the damaged area and grind any exposed ,
' steel to a bright finish. Solvent wipe the surrounding 305
/ .
finish with Carboline's Phenoline Thinner or xylol. Spray or - brush apply Phenoline 305 finish at 4 mils nominal DFT over the (, damaged area, overlap at least one inch onto the surrounding 305 ' finish. 4.4.2.9 Repair of Topcoat and/or CZ 11 Major Defects - (Major defects are defined as an area, either circular or linear, in which a h" diameter circle could be completely inscribed at any point or along the entire length.) Spot blast or abrade, machine or hand, the damaged area. Power tool or hand abrading must be very thorough in order to prepare the surface for Carbo Zinc 11 touch-up. The result-ing surface preparation shall be eqt.ivalent to a near white SP-10 Specification. A surface rauchness equivalent to a minimum of one mil blast profile shall be,o ed. 4.4.3.0 Coating Interface - At coating interface for finish and/or primer coat, the existing coating shall be " feathered back" a sufficient distance to ensure a smooth final coating systs. When interfacing the 305/CZ11 system and the 305/06 system, the ! interface of the two primers shall be no greater than ih" in width. w 4.4.3.1 Cure of Minor Topcoat Repair - Minor defects, as defined in Section l 4.4.2.7, which are noted in the topcoat and repaired, may be in-spected for final acceptance after cure to recoat time as stated l in Section 4.4.2.1 (4) has been satisfied. Full cure of topcoat repairs shall be satisfied prior to placement into service.
~
c @ E B C 1L
+ s s 4 i ri CCP-30 Rev. 10 DCN #3
~$ 9/21/82
't 45 h u;"
Sheet 2 of 4
, m ww . ;. ...w - m ,. . , . - ~ . . . ~ . .a a-.
. w. .t .. . . . u. .
1 1 EFFECTIVE ! PROCEDURE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE ~ ' CPSES ._ JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 11 of 13 4.4.2.6 Brush touch-up painting shall be done on the finish coat in accordance with the following:
- 1. Carboline Application Instruction (Phenoline 305) Bulletin 775.
- 2. Carboline Product Data Sheet (Phenoline 305 Primer and Finish)
Bulletin 473. Brush touch-up and complete application is allowed with no area restrictions. 2.7 Treatment of Rust Stains - If surface is contaminated with rust
- stains or minute metallic particles, then surface shall be pre-pared by solvent wiping with Phenoline 305 Thinner or xyloi and
% overcoating with a coat of Phenoline 305 prepared in accordance with Section 4.4.2.4.
.2.8 Repair of Topcoat and/or CZ 11 Minor Defects - (Minor defects are defined as an area, either circular or linear, in which a h" g diameter circle could not be completely inscribed at any point along the entire length.) Blast or abrade, by machine or hand, the Pheno-line 305 finish surrounding the damaged area and grind any exposed T steel to a bright finish. Solvent wipe the surrounding 305 '
[ finish with Carboline's Phenoline Thinner or xylol. Spray or brush Phenoline 305 finish at approximately 4 mil DFT over the damaged area. Overlap onto the surrounding coating a sufficient amount to insure a smooth and continuous topcoat system. 7 fr. 4.4.2.9 Repair of Topcoat and/or CZ 11 Major Defects - (llajor defects are defined as an area, either circular or line r, in which a h" C/} . l diameter circle could be ccmpletely inscribed at any point or along the entire length.) Spot blast or abrade, machine or hand, the __ damaged area. Power tool or hand abrading must be very thorough in order to prepare the surface for Carbo Zinc 11 touch-up. The result-ing surface preparation shall be equivalent to a near white SP-10 Specification. A surface roughness equivalent to a minimum of one mil blast profile shall be obtained. 4.4.3.0 Coating Interface - At coating interface for finish and/or primer coat, the existing coating shall be " feathered back" a sufficient distance to ensure a smooth final coating system. When interfacing the 305/CZ11 system and the 305/06 system, the interface of the two primers shall be no greater than ih" in width. 4.4.3.1 Cure of Minor Topcoat Repair - Mino; defects, as defined in Section 4.4.2.7, which are noted in the topcoat and repaired, may be in-p) spected for final acceptance after cure to recoat time as stated (
.T in Section 4.4.2.1 (4) has been satisfied. Full cure of topcoat T [5.f ( .(t ;. repairs shall be satisfied prior to placement into service.
t*
, 5 t.pR ha lL v i CCP-30 Rev. 10 DCN #4 12/21/82 Sheet 2 of 2 e
.s . .- ,. ~. . v
..w , , . .: ..
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 11 of 13 4.4.2.6 Brush touch-up painting shall be done on the finish coat in accordance with the following:
- 1. Carboline Application Instruction (Phenoline 305) Bulletin 775.
M 2. Carboline Product Data Sheet (Phenoline 305 Primer and Finish) Bulletin 473. Brush touch-up and complete application is g o allowed with no area restrictions. 4.4.2.7 Treatment of Rust Stains - If surface is contaminated with rust stains or minute metallic particles, then surface shall be pre-pared by solvent wiping with Phenoline 305 Thinner or xylol and q overcoating with a coat of Phenoline 305 prepared in accordance w with Section 4.4.2.4. 4.4.2.8 Repair of Topcoat and/or CZ 11 Minor Defects - (Minor defects are defined as an area, either circular or linear, in which a \" diameter circle could not be completely inscribed at any point along h'- s-the entire length.) Blast or abrade, by n6 chine or hand, the Pheno-line 305 finish surrounding the damaged area and grind any exposed steel to a bright finish. Solvent wipe the surrounding 305
' finish with Carboline's Phenoline Thinner or xylol. Spray or
- = brush apply Phenoline 305 finish at 4 mils nominal DFT over the
.m_ damaged area, overlap at least one inch onto the surrounding 305
-N finish.
4.4.2.9 Repair of Topcoat and/or CZ 11 Major Defects - (Major defects are defined as an area, either circular or linear, in which a h" diameter circle could be completely inscribed at any point or along the entire length.) Spot blast or abrade, machine or hand, the damaged area. Power tool or hand abrading must be very thorough in order to prepare the surface for Carbo Zinc 11 touch-up. The result-ing surface preparation shall be equivalent to a near white SP-10 Specification. A surface roughness equivalent to a minimum of one mil blast profile shall be obtained. 4.4.3.0 Coating Interface - At coating interface for finish and/or primer coat, the existing coating shall be " feathered back" a sufficient distance to ensure a smooth final coating system. When interfacing the 305/CZ11 system and the 305/06 system, the interface of the two primers shall be no greater than ih" in width. 4.5 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4.5.1 After coating system cure, final inspection, and resolution of all discrepancies is completed, the QC Inspector shall document the final acceptance by completing and signing the final accept-ance record and will transmit a copy of this rec , M ttd toa Jhe Bg ,@ yN s
. .% 4 3 $
. s . :, , .. , ,:.
. n:a v.c . s.v.
. . c :.vw. , .s.u :.. . , , :::. .:. . . .;. . .c.
. . ; ; , e. o
. -. u ...
~
l l T PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE
~ cpsgs 1 1
JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 12 of 13 Paint Superintendent as soon as possible after final acceptance is made. 4.6 HOLD POINTS 4.6.1 Onsite receipt of coating materials. 4.6.2 Substrates before and following surface preparation. 4.6.3 Mixing and preparation of coating material for application. 4.6.4 Film characteristics after drying and curing. 4.6.5 Control of ambient conditions and surface temperatures during all phases of the coating work. 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 ATTACHMENTS
- 1. Painter Qualification Record
- 2. Special Coating Procedure
- 3. CZ 11 Cure to Topcoat Time
- 4. Pot Life CZ 11 and Phenoline 305
5.2 REFERENCES
- 1. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-55-14,
" Containment Steel Liner", Latest Revision
- 2. Steel Structures Paint Council, Volume 2, Second Edition
- 3. Carboline Corporation " Application Instructions",
October 76-N Revision and Bulletin Number 775 - data sheets October 76-N Revision and 473, latest Revision
- 4. ANSI N 101.2,
" Protective Coatings (Paints) for Light Water Nuclear Reactor Containment Facilities"
- 5. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-AS-31
" Protective Coatings", Latest Revision
_A d e
- , , , , . , _ , .- _ -- ,_v., - - - - - - - , . , , - -. . . , , . - - , -
~ . . . .,_4.- ., ,._.....,c..,
.. m. -e . , . .,.-e -
. . . . . .. o . . .- -
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE
- . BROWN & ROOT, INC. ItJMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES ,
JOB 35-1195 CCP-30 10 1/26/82 1 of 1 ATTACHMENT 4 POT LIFE - CZ 11 8 Hour Max. Pot Life
~
8 ko. . , _ .
%- a Zun- -
I M-- - gjl ,, a POT LIFE PHENOLINE 305 TEMPERATURE (OF ) UNTHINNED THINNED-50% 50 - 54 10 hrs 24 hrs i 55 - 59 7 hrs 24 hrs 60 - 64 4h hrs 24 hrs 65 - 69 3 hrs 24 hrs 70 - 74 2 hrs 24 hrs 75 - 79 1h hrs 24 hrs
- 80 - 84 14 hrs 24 hrs 85 - 89 1h hrs 24 hrs 90 - 95 1 hr 24 hrs l
Pot life for coatings thinned up to but not including max. amount of thinner allowed, use pot life for unthinned material. E w e
f; 4 . v i a i Attachment D CCP-40, Rev. 5 (Aug. 18, 1982) 4 Y l h.
BR0sN & R(,07 INC. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE CPSES NUMBER REVISION CATE PAGE JOB 35-1195 CC P-40 5 8/18/82 1 of 13 TITLE: ORIGINATOR: M dI.4 /b
/ UATE PROTECTIVE COATING
/' -
m 0F CONCRETE SURFACES REVIEWED BY: //X/ - '
. /. J . Tfir P!N1 CCAY \ t((/ fM:Wi?V M,%w 0 ATE CCT\* h ' Q/ TW3 QA f Y1 APPROVED BY / 6 . b A M #r+' ri /M DATE 9 CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER
-A. /) .>
9 UL .!/ R,, oi TABLE OF CONTENTS '.-)/m.h. ,/
1.0 INTRODUCTION
4 ' 1.1 PURPOSE 1.2 SCOPE p 1.3 GENERAL DISCUSSION . 2.0 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SY'4BOLS S/4 2.1 TERMS ff[ 2.2 ABBREVIATIONS 2.3 SYMBOLS 3.0 SPECIAL ITEMS AND OPERATIONS ' 3.1 QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL
\ 'k 3.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ^ f*/
3.3 INSTRUMENTS AND THEIR USE ' 3.4 COCUMENTATION 3.5 RECEIVING, STORAGE, AND DISPENSING OF COATING MATERI 4.0 PROCEDURE FOR COATING 4.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES AND COATING MATERIAL 4.2 PREPARATION OF COATitdi MATERIALS 4.3 APPLICATION OF SURFACER AND FINISH COATING 4.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4.5 HOLD POINTS ., 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 ATTACHMENTS
5.2 REFERENCES
$p Ud O n .
O I .* !, ; fy (! n ., n e(' fi?, . j]l iiJ.i. E Y( h. 13 ,M
._$ I
P a g i
,.~
JOB 35-1195 COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER 6 Notice applicable to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195- CCP-40 Rev. 5 . This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: Please replace the following pages with the attached: ATTACHMEllT 5; Special Coating Procedure C-1 Rev.1 Pages 1 through 5 (.. Reviewed by: w! Originator b) ~
!! Niffh8} b b. > - Ylw ' b$/'4 / e n Brown & Root Quality Assurgice ' 5ste
/Date Q '
Approved by: , TUGC0 Qey' Assurance Date
., A- M /gjF/fd October 14, 1983 Construction Project Manager ' ' 0 ate ~ Effective Gate IIi _
I J08 35-1195 COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER s Notice appitcable to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195- ccp-40 Rev.s . I This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: l l Please replace the following page(s) with the attached: Page 7 of 13 ( 1 1 Reviewed by: 0ll9l05 a' OI: TE Y/fkM/ 2 _~ - .....
' Date Brown & Root Quality Assurance; Date OPigigator
. . . ,f lp ,
- f .j ,&'f --('*; *f ? .' )
Approved by: TUGC0 Quatity, Assurance Date
/?
- j. h4<M /
.. L."'" 8 f - Aucue 30. 1e.o1 Construction Project Manager Date Effective Gate W
JOB 35-1195 COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATION Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CHANGE NOTICE NUMBER 4 Notice applicable to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195- CCP-40 Rev. 5 . This change will be incorporated in the next revision of the procedure. I i Change the procedure as follows: Please replace the following page(s) with the attached: [ , Page 7 of 13 4 4 N i i 4 ~ Reviewed by: - f Y b/h) Brown
$&NRoot.s.Quality
- v. .
l,
. Assuranc
,Catsf Gate i
Origiptor
/ ;
n Mu. [/ Y Approved by: TUGca ,aate Jy , F . ('e , ;: . f . , , , , , Construction Project Manager 9 Data
/ '.Q August 17, 1983 Effective Date
J08 35 1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station Construction Procaeure DOCUMDT CMNGE NOTICE NUMBER 3 This notice applies to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195. CCP-40 Revision 5. This change will be incorperstaa in the next revision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: Replace the following pages with the attached: Page 3 of 13 Page 4 of 13 Page 5 of 13 Page 13 of 13 Add pages: 1 . Page 13a of 13 ATTACMENT 4 l Page lof 2 ! Page 2 of 2 ATTACMENT 5 Page 1 of 5 Page 2 of 5 l Page 3 of 5 Page 4 of 5 l Page 5 of 5 Reviewed by:
$n tnatar 6 4Q 3/ Cate' N?} U kV/{TC/di 2*86
# 3rown 4 Acat Quait:y Assuranca Jata Grtg/
R viev
- Approved by:
=
/ h T;cco ousl y saurar.ca / Date 0 %b p-=s-sy Ginsrucloniro;ec-Aanager ;ata w . ,s ,w, iff ec tve Ja a
408 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam L.ectric Station , Sheet 1 of 3 Construction Procaoure 00CUMOT CNANGE NOTICE E'M8G ? This notice applies to Construction Procedure No. 35-1195- CCP-40 Revision 5 . This change will be incor:orstad in the next revision of the procedure. Char.ge the procedure as follows: Replace the following pages with the attached: Page 6 of 13 Page 7 of 13 t. I 1 Revie d by;
/ &!/ I.>/*!J 2 ~ l95) /] o a . /ff)$l j ( *7-D.
Orig nator Ja:a / irewn i Acot Qu it:y Assurance Ja:s Revt e . Approved by: Date WGCo Qualg' Assurance C.G K s/, w. , s 3:n
;a:a iff ective i,a:a Qns nction Pro;ect .4anager
J08 35-1195 Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station Sheet 1 of 3 Construction Procedure DOCUMENT CNANGE NOTICE .1 UMBER 1 This notice applies to Construction Procedurs No. 35 1195.CCP.40 Revision 5 . This change will be incorporated in the next r aision of the procedure. Change the procedure as follows: Replace the following pages with the attached: Page 12 of 13 Page 13 of 13 i Reason for change: Additional requirements. Rwiewed by: Or1 gin,ator n D Y /~S 8] 04ta M/b bE #PJ> I-03 3rpn&AcotGualityAssuranca Jaca R is vt-
; /df~/./cf) '
TJGCo Qualit*/ Assurance Date G,'
/_mM g , d,/ m /. p 91_ , 1/11/83 Gans;r'ac toi. Pro;ect Manager ;ata Effec 1ve Qa a A- _ _ _ . .
d PROCEDURE . EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 2 of 13
1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE 1.1.1 The purpose of this procedure is to establish the methods by which the surfacer and finish coats are to be applied to concrete surfaces in accordance with specification, draw-ing, and manufacturer's requirements. 1.2 SCOPE 1.2.1 The scope of this procedure covers the surface preparation and coating of cementitous surfaces inside the reactor build-ing and radiation area as delineated by Reference 1. . 1.3 GENERAL DISCUSSION 1.3.1 All coating materials addressed by this procedure shall be as manufactured by Imperial Professional Coating of New 0.-leans, Louisiana. Tha coating system will consist of a surfacer ' ( coat of NUTEC #11S, touch-up h th NUTEC #11S or NUTEC #11, and a finish coat of NUTEC #1231. In order to prevent finish l coat damage, the finish coat will normally be applied as close as possible to turn-over of the area to the owner or as required due to the setting of equipment or other itens which would make an area inaccessible. Any permanent equipment located in the area to be coated will be adequately protected from contamination caused by surface preparation or coating application. 2.0 DEFINITIONS OF TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 2.1 TERMS 2.1.1 Substrate - The uncoated surface to which a coating is applied. 2.1.2 Pinhole - A minor discontinuity in the coating film which exposes l the primer. l l 2.2 ABBREVIATIONS 2.2.1 (NONE) L 2.3 SYMBOLS 2.3.1 (NONE) m y v - w -
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE
~
BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 3 of 13 3.0 SPECIAL ITEMS AND OPERATIONS 3.1 QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL 3.1.1 Coating Application Personnel shall be qualified per pre-vious experience and/or demonstrated ability. In addition, each applicator shall have been certified by the Paint Dept. Superintendent or his repersentative per technical data and demonstrated ability. Application precedures shall be in compliance with this procedure. This shall be verified by completing a form similar to Attachment I which will be exe-cuted by the B&R Paint Superintendent or his representative. A coating manufacturer's representative will be available for technical supervision upon initial painting effort. 3.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 3.2.1 All appropriate health, safety, and fire protection require-ments pertaining to surface preparation and coating applica- ' x tion shall be followed. It shall be the responsibility of the ' Safety Department representative who will be present to randomly monitor safety during coating application. 3.3 INSTRUMENTS AND THEIR USE 3.3.1 The Painting Foreman and General Foreman shall have access to and be familiar with the use of thermometers, wet film gauges, and psychrometers for measuring relative humidity. Viscosity measuring devices will not be used. Wet film gauges will be randomly used during coating application; readings will be limited to the minimum necessary to control coating thickness. 3.4 DOCUMENTATION 3.4.1 Records shall be maintained on Attachment 1 and 4 listed in Section 5.1. After completion, each form shall be forwarded to The Brown & Root Document Control Center for filing and distribution to the various parties as listed on the distribution
' list.
j l
- ~.
M-d 6/24/83 CCP-40 Rev. R DCN M Sheet 9 of 13
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 4 of 13 3.5 RECEIVING, STORAGE AND DISPENSING OF COATING MATERIALS 3.5.1 Receiving and Storage 3.5.1.1 Upon receipt of a shipment of coating materials, the B&R QC Representative accepting shipment :; hall be responsible for completing all necessary receiving inspection documen-tation. General receiving procedures shall be in accord-It i and with Brown & Root Construction Procedure CP-CPM 8.1. shall then be sagregated from "Non-Q" materials and stored in the Paint Storage Building where temperatures will be between 400F and 1000F. Rises in air temperature maintainegF up to 120 is acceptable f.or as long as fourteen days. (Ac-cumulative). Infrequent dips (for periods not to exceef 24 i hours) in air temperature in storage areas as. low as 33 F is acceptable; however, prior to applicJtion the coatings shall be brought back into the 500 - 90' range. Temporary storage may be required at the Receiving Warehouse due to receiving or other problems.
~
, 3.5.2 Dispensing ,
3.5.2.1 When coating materials are needed in the field, it shall be transferred from the controlled area to a designated temporary storage area or area of intended use in the field. Due to limited shelf-life of coating materials, this shall be done on a "first-in" "first out" basis. After materials have been partially used from an individual container, the said container cannot be resealed and returned to "Q" storage area for latar use. Containers opened and partially distributed from the "Q" paint storage area may be resealed and the remaining contents used for "Q" painting.- Except for thinners, the contents from partially used containers shall not be-reused after a period of 7 days has elapsed from date of initial' opening. 3.6 Special Coating Procedure L 3.6.1 When items require special coating not covered under the content of this procedure, Attachment 4 shall be completed by the Protective Coatings engineer and transmitted to pa.inting supeintendent for construction. Special coatings procedures issued via Attachment 4 shall be attached to this procedure after completion. 4 3.6.2 Special Coating Procedures added by Attachment 4 shall recieve a unique identification number issued in sequence beginning with C-1. The scope of the procedure shall describe the working limits of the special procedure with pertinet storage and coating require-ments listed under the requirements section. The approvals section shall Save the signatures of the Project Civil Engineer, TUGCo QA Manager if safety related, Originator, and the Construction Project Manager. Each procedure shall exhibit the revision number and issue date. , CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #3 - 6/24/83 Sheet 3 of .13 -
. .-- . - - . . . ~ . - - - .. _ _ - . . . . . - - - - . - - - . - . - .
I PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE REVISION DATE PAGE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 5 of 13 4.0 PROCEDURE 4.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES AND C0ATING MATERIALS 4.1.1 Preparation of Surfacer 4.1.1.1 Normal surface preparation shall consist of wster blasting with 4,000 P.S.I. to 10,000 P.S.I. Additionally, surface preparation may be accomplished by the use of approximetely 2,500 P.S.I. water blasting with sand injectioa, acid etching with an Imperial recom-mended solution, or straight sand blasting. Any heavy oil or grease deposits shall be removed by steam cleaning, trisodium phosphate washing with a mixture of 3-6 pounds T.S.P. per gallon of water, or use of an Imperial recommended detergent. Following surface preparation, the surface shall be free of construction dust, laitance, and loose deposits. If cleaning
. does not remove oil and grease, the contaminated concrete surface will be chipped away and patched before coating. All T.S.P. cleaned areas will be flushed witt clean water. Holes or f voids in the concrete surface that exceed 1/2" in depth shall be repaired with dry-pack or epoxy grout. Detrimental surface irreg- e ularities such as projections, fins, or ridges shall be reduced by bush-hamering, power grinding, or stoning. Wood particles of
" fuzz" remaining after water blasting is acceptable. Recomended surface preparation shall include power tools which are capable of removing liatance and curing membranes from concrete surfaces.
4.1.1.2 Markings on concrete - Before appIf cation of IIS,11 or 1201, all markings (ink, pencil, chalk, or fe!t tip markers) on wall and floors shall be solvent wiped in accordance with SSPC-SP-1 using DL-6A or comercially available MEK or Xylol. tiarking paint (surveyor marks) shall be removed by solvent wiping, water blasting, sandblasting, or power tool cleaning. Discolored coatings due to aging or stains shall be abraded and solvent wiped to remove the discoloration. Residual marking or discoloration remaining in pores
- . below the plane of the surface is acceptable.
4.1.1.3 Repair of embedded foreign objects - Embedded foreign objects such as nails, rebar chairs, bolts, wood, or plastic shall be repaired per the following guidelines before application of NUTEC 11S surfacer.
- 1. Objects protruding from the surface shall be ground or cut i
smooth until the object is flush with the concrete surface !, prior to application of 115. l i 2. If the object is loosely adhered in the concrete, it shall be removed -(in case of wook splinters or wood " fuzz" an attempt shall be made to remove by high pressure water blast-l ing). Rever to section 4.1.1.1. l i CCP-40 Rey, 5 DCN #3 6/ 24/83 Sheet 4 of 13
4 D - PROCEDURE ! !- BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER ! REVISION l EFFECTIVE DATE : PAGE CPSES . > JOB 35-1195 CCP f 5- i 8/ 18/82 l 6 of 13
- 4. Metal objects larger than four square inches shall be coated with an inorganic zinc primer in accordance with CCP-30,
- 5. Objects which are recessed to a depth greater than 1/2" shall be repaired using a " dry pack" or epoxy grout.
4.1.1.4 Surface appearance - Surface smoothness or " glossy" appearance in concrete will not be detrimental to the performance of NUTEC 115 providing the surface is free of water,' oil, grease, laitance, efflorescence, deleterious curing membranes, or other contaminants as outlined in this procedure. If NUTEC 10 curing membrane is present with thickness- sufficient to give a glossy appearance, the surface shall be abraided to " roughen" the NUTEC 10 prior to appli-cation of 11S surfacer. 4.2 PREPARATION OF C0ATING MATERIALS - 4.2.1 Surface Coat 4.2.1.1 The surfacer, NUTEC #115, is packaged, in a three component (" kit consisting of a base, curing agent, and filler. The base and curing agent shall be thoroughly mixed first. If necessary, box the mixture to assure that all the base and cure has been 3 used. The filler shall then be slowly added under constant agitation and mixed until a smooth blend is achieved. The patching material, NUTEC #11, is prepared the same way. Partial mixes for i NUTEC #115 shall be in accordance with Attachment 2. I 4.2.2 Finish Coat 4.2.2.1 The finish coat, NUTEC #1201, is a two component epoxy topcoat < consisting of a base and cure. These shall be thoroughly mixed under constant agitation until a homogenous blend is achieved. Partial mixes of NUTEC #1201 shall be in accordance with Attach-ment 3. Minimum induction times shall be as follows: O INDUCTION TIMES TEMPERATURE F 50-59 45 min. 60-69 30 min. 70-79 20 min. 80-90 10 min. 91-100 .NONE 4 T
.- JV w
.CCP-40 -Rey, 5 OCN #2 Sheet 2.of -3
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISZON DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 7oof 13 4.3 APPLICATION OF SURFACER & FINISH C0ATING 4.3.1 Surfacer Coat 4.3.1.1 Coating material shall be applied using a bottom feed con-ventional pressure pot-mastic gun arrangement. To facilitate application on areas such as floors and for repair work, trowel, squeege or float application without the use of the mastic arrangement may be used. Under normal conditions, the concrete surface shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 23 days prior to application of protective coatings. However, if the coatings are to be applied to pour backs, grouting, or patching to which IAJTEC 10 has been applied as a curing compound, coating may be performed after a minimum of 6 days has elapsed from NUTEC 10 application time. Abandoned hilti bolt holes, tie holes, and spalled concrete as defined in CEI-20 and patched per CCP-12 and grout under base plates which have 3 square feet or less of exposed grouted surface to be coated, may be coated after 43 hours cure. Material shall
. be applied until the concrdce surface is completely covered, with extra material being added to large holes or depressions. A single blade rubber scueege is then used to smooth out the material. Care shall be taken to eliminate as many pinholes as possible by use of - 'a back and forth motion. Application parameters shall be as follows:
- 1. Minimum and maximum values of surface and ambient temperatures 0
shall be between 50 F and 100 F. Infrequent dips in temperature to 40U F is permissible during application ang/or cure; however, the elapsed time the temperature is below 50 F shall be added to the cure time. Apolication gf the coating shall not begin unless the surface temperature is 5"F above the dew point. Pot life shall be as stated in the chart below. zal PJTUF5 H.41 I.D . i
!? N' N::"=
L< . . . . . . M sa e = 20 ao iw T??.PER.TURE *?
- 2. Humidity may vary as high as 100".; however, free standing water shall be removed. Coating application over a damp surface is permissible. Under no condition shall :lVTEC 11S be applied to a surface containing free standing wats. Free standing water may be identified by:
CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #5 M 8/30/83 Sheet 2 of 2
. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT,-INC. NUMdER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES . ,
JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 , 8/18/82. 8 of 13
- a. Reduced viscosity of 11S during application, and excessive sagging from bug holes.
- b. Wet rings around bug holes. .___
- c. Failure of 11S to adhere to the substrate during the squeegeeing or trowelling process.
- d. Visible signs of surface water,
- e. Running hand over the surface resulting in moisture on the hand.
- f. Product instability resulting in white streaks.
- 3. Thickness of surface for level 1 service may vary between 10 and 35 mils, depending on the surface roughness. For areas other than level 1, the recommended dry film thicknesses for sarfacer is 10-60 mils.
(_ 4. Tack free times shall be as follows: TEMPERATURE OF #11 #11S 50-59 6 hrs. 8 hrs. 60-79 4 hrs. 6 hrs. 80-99 2 hrs. 4 hrs. 100 1 hr. 2 hrs.
- 5. Curing time shall be as follows:
CURING TIME BEFORE O TEMPERATURE F TOPC0ATING WITH 1201 50-59 72 hrs. 60-69 48 hrs. 70-79 24 hrs. 80-89 18 hrs. 90-100 12 hrs. l I
\~-
l l l
+ ____
- v -r-r---*'y ,, n ,., ., , , .
* " ' 9y.
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 9 of 13 TEMPERATURE OF FULL CURE 11, 11S 50-59 10 days 60-69 8 days 70-79 7 days 80-89 6 days-90-100 5 days No appreciable cure takes place below 50 F, therefore, main-tain area coated above 500F. Infrequent dips in temperature to 400F is permissible; however, duration below 500 F shall be added to cure time.
- 6. NUTEC 115 may be recoated with #11 or #11S as soon as I the initial coat has dried such that the paint shall not adhere to the thumb when downward pressure is exerted on the paint film while turning a 900 angle. (this does not refer to a two pass application method). Dry time will vary with film thickness. At thicknesses greater than 35 mils, a minimum of 24 hours shall be allowed prior to applying a full coat of NUTEC 11.
- 7. NUTEC 115 may be touched up with #115 or #11 as soon as it has l set to touch. #11S and #11 may be subjected to personnel foot traffic after 24 hours cure and lay down of material
' after full cure.
- 8. Thinning of #11S is not normally required; however, at lower temperatures, it is permissible to thin up to 5% by volmae with Imperial's DL-54 thinner.
4.3.1.2 Imperial coatings may be applied in the following sequential order:
#115/1201/11S/1201 or 11S/1201/11/1201. Millage requirements per coat are as follows:
Service Level 1 NUTEC 115 10-35 Mils NUTEC 11 3-20 Mils NUTEC 1201 3-16 Mils l Areas other than Service Level 1 NUTEC 11S 10-60 Mils NUTEC 11 3-20 Mils 3-16 Mils NUTEC 1201 l , 4.3.1.3 Repair and recoating of NUTEC 115,,- Remove all loose coating and concrete by sanding or wire brushing and feather edge adjacent to the coating. The arec shall then be blown off with compressed air, washed with water or DL-54 thinner (Non-Q) and coated with NUTEC 11S or NUTEC 11 until the desired film thickness is achieved. M'5"% _ . . . . _ . . . . ~ . . . .,
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 10 of 13 4.3.1.4. Repair of Pinholes, blowholes, or overworked areas - Pemove any contaminants by compressed air or clean water. Apply NUTEC 11 to the defective area and work back and forth to fill in area. NUTEC #11S surfacer may be smoothed by spraying a mist of Imperial DL-54 thinner on the #11S film 15-30 minutes after its application. By using a trowel or squeegee, the solvent can be worked over the surface to smooth or polish the film, thus eliminatinq the defects due to overworking of the 11S. 4.3.1.5 Muderacking - Area shall be repaired by means of grinding, sanding, or wire brush. The area will then be blown down with compressed air and then wiped with DL-54 thinner. 4.3.1.6 Repair of Sags and Runs - Inside containment, runs or sags shall be abraded down to adjoining thickness. Outside containment, if coating is sound, sags and runs will not be repaired. 4.3.1.7 Repair of Embedded Foreign Particles - Embedded foreign particles shall be removed by abrading. In pinholes and discontinuities exist, then area shall be repaired in accordance with Section 4.3.1.4. 4.3.1.8 Treatment o Rust Stains - RemcVe residue, though not necessarily " the stain, with bristle brush and water or Imperial Thinner #DL-54. 4.3.1.9 Treatment of Interfaces with Other Coatings - Interfaces with projecting coated items shall be constructed tay. abutting the 115 up to the projecting item. Interfaces with flush mounted coated items shall be constructed by feathering the 11S inte the coated item. 4.3.1.10 Repair of Scorched Areas - If the concrete is not damaged, scorched areas shall be repaired by abrading the surface until the dis-colored area is removed. Visual inspection of the area shall be conducted to assure the area is acceptable. The area should then be coated with 11 or 11S as appropriate. 4.3.1.11 Coating of Expansion Joints - Expansion joints will not be coated. Coatings will be feathered back at the edges. 4.3.1.12 Repair of Scratches and Similar Damage - Any scratches or damaged areas shall be abraded by hand or mechanical methods until loosely adherent particles are removed. If the damaged area extends to con-crete and is h" or less in diameter additional surfacer need not be appl ied. If the damage extending to concrete substrate is greater than " in diameter but 2 sq. inches or less in area, the area may be repaired with 11 or 115 for. surfacer prior to topcoating. Damages involving areas larger than that stated above shall be repaired with normal coating system.
- v, w - v mr ~- m y --- , *w-,. .y.. ,y r- -
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES l JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 11 of 13 4.3.2 Finish 4.3.2.1 Finish coat shall be applied by brush, roller, conventional or airless spray methods. If brush or roller application is used, care must be taken to ensure a smooth uniform finish surface.
- The material shall be allowed to become " tack free" before any other construction operations proceed which could create con-tamination by dust or other foreign matter. Pinhole criteria shall be in accordance with NACE T-6F-3, condition "B". Any runs or sags having a detrimental effect on the coating system shall be removed and repaired. The following application parameters shall govern:
- 1. The permissibfe range og surface and ambient temperature shall be between 50 F and 100 F. Infrequent dips in temperature to 400 F is permissible during application and/or cure; however, the elapsed time the temperature is below 50 F shall be deducted from the cure time. Application shall not begin unless the surface tenperature is at least 50 F above the dew point. If increased workability is desired, Reactic #1201 may be thinned up to 30% by volume with Imperial DL-6A thinner. It is normally advisable to use more thinner at lower temperatures and when using conventional spray equipment.
2t'. I
/C.-5
. PXWE 3 isAS to 4
+1
_.j , , , . , le* W
- w ao* ao- toa*
TEMPERATURE 4 l 2. Thickness of 1201 topcoat for Service Level 1 and Service Level II areas shall be as specified in Section 4.3.1.2.
- 3. Coating materials shall be applied as a heavy, wet coat in even, parallel passes, overlapping each pass approximately 50%.
l. L f 'A
.__M m_-
.c.
3. I i PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE i BROWN i ROOT, INC. REVISION DATE PAGE NUMBER l-CPSES JOB 35-1195 l CCP-40 5 8/18/82 i 12 of 13
- 4. Recoating time of NUTEC #1201 is 24 hours.
- 5. Tack free time is as follows:
TEMPERATURE OF TACK FREE TIME 50 8 hrs. 60 4 hrs. 80 2 hrs. 100 1 hr.
- 6. Full cure time is as follows:
O
- TEMPERATURE F FULL CURE TIME 50-59 11 days 60-79 8 days 80-99 7 days 100 5 days
#1201 may be subjected to personnel foot traffic after 24 hours'at or above surface taperature of 80 0F. At temperature durations below-50U F little or no curing will take place, therefore, after coating, '
0 maintain taperature above 50 F. 4.3.2.2 Repair of Runs and Sags - Runs or sags showing evidence of cracking must be removed. Runs or sags inside Service Level I areas which exhibit no other coating defects, shall be abraded to the thickness of adjoining coating. Runs or sags outsidc. Service Level I areas which exhibit no other coating defect need not be removed. 4.3.2.3 Repair of Embedded Foreign Particles - Embedded foreign particles shall be removed by abrading. The area shall then be given a light overcoat of #1201. Any loose particles shall be removed by brush-ing, vacuum, or compressed c r. 4.3.2.4 Repair of Pinholes and Discontinuities - Any loose particies shall be removed by brushing, vacuum or compressed air. The pinholes and discontinuicies shall then be repaired by use of a brush or squeege. Pinholes and small discontinuities may be repaired at time of final inspection without a later reinspection of tne repair. If the re-paired coating will be subjected t:: a high moisture environment after placement into service, the placement into service shall not be made until full cure of the repair. 4.3.2.5 Repair of Scratches and Damaged Areas - Any scratches or damages areas shall be abraded by hand or power tool cleaning or spot blasting until loosely adherent particles are removed. If the damaged area extends to concrete substrate and is k" or less in diameter, the damaged area may be coated with NUTEC #1201. If the damaged area extending to con-crete substrate is greater than k" in diameter by 2 sq, inches or less in an area, the area may be repaired with NUTEC #11 with a topcoat of CCP-40 'Rev. 5 OCN #1 1/11/83 Sheet 2 of 3 y
l PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE
-BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 13 of13 NUTEC #1201. Damaged areas to concrete substrate larger than the above values shall be repaired with the normal coating system.
4.3.2.6 Treatment of Rust Stains - If the topcoat surface is contaminated with rust stains, the area shall be cleaned by use of bristle brush and water or solvent wiping with Thinner DL-6A. Any remaining stains not acceptable from a cosmetic viewpoint will be covered by a light overcoat of NUTEC #1201, 4.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4.4 .1 Full cure of the coating system shall be maintained prior to testing and/or inspection for other than visual inspection. Final acceptance inspection may be performed, when visual inspection only is required, after topcoat has cured per paragraph 4.3.2.1(4). After final inspection, and resolution of all discrepancies are com-pleted, the QC Inspector shall document the final acceptance by com-pleting and signing the Final Acceptance Record and will transmit a copy of this record to the B&R Paint Superintendent as soon as possible after final acceptance is made. ' 4.5 HOLD POINTS 4.5.1 On-site receipt of coating material.
. 4.5.2 Substrates before preparation if blasting or bush hamering is to be utilized and following all methods of preparation.
4.5.3 Mixing and preparation of coating material for application. 4.5.4 Film characteristics after drying and curing. 4.5.5 Control of ambient conditions and surface temperatures during all phases of the coating work. 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 ATTACHMENTS
- 1. Painter Qualification Record
- 2. Table for Partial Mixes of NOTEC 11S
- 3. Table for Partial Mixes of NUTEC #1201
- 4. Special Coating Procedure
- 5. Special Coating Procedure C-1 j o
p-CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #3 6/24/83 Sheet 5 of 13
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE , CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 13a Of 13 i i
5.2 REFERENCES
11 . Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-AS-31, " Protective Coating" Latest Revision
- 2. Steel Structures Paint Council, Vol.2, Second Edition
- 3. Imperial Data Sheet NUTEC #11S and NUTEC #1201, Dated 7/77
- 4. NACE Publication T-6F-3 t
i CC P-40 Rey. 5 DCN #3 T %
~ ~ - ~ ' '
6/24/83 Sheet 6 nf 1-
- PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE l BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE I PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 1 of 1 ATTACHMENT 1 Painter Qualification Record GENERAL DATA Date Report Number TECHNICAL DATA Name of Painter Summary of Field Experience Experience with Following Product Types Application Test for Specifici Substrate Additional Qualifications (Scncol)
Signature Applicator's Field Supervisor Distribution: Painting Supt. QC Department TUGC0 QA Vault (Original)
~
.... ..... :. ~ '
I ! PROCEDURE i EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER ! REVISION DATE PAGE
~'
l 4 CPSES 1 JOB 35-1195 i
, I' CCP-40 t 5 8/18/82 l 1 of 1 ATTACHMENT 2 NUTE4 Ils ~
PElWIIS3IBLE BASE CURE FILLER THINNER lbs. oz. Ibs. oz. Ibs. oz. ots. o4. O Gal. - 1 Qt. 10.5 0 5.3 3 0 0 l 1.9 0 kl. . 2 Ot. 1 5.1 0 12.6 6 0 0 f3.2 0 21. . 3 Ot. I 15.1 1 3 1 0 0 ! 4.3 1 31. . 0 at. 2 10.2 1 1. 3 12 0 0 ' 6.4 4.8 15.6 15 0 0 8 1 041. . 1 at. 3 1 1 21. . 2 1t. 3 15.4 2 5.1 13 0 0 9.6 i .a i . . 3 et. 4 s., 2 iu Zi 0 0 n .2 2 41. . 0 Qt. 5 4.5 3 2.5 24 0 0 12.$ 2 041. . 1 Ot. 5 15.0 3 3.3 27 0 0 l14.4 ., 2 21. . 2 Ot. 6 9.6 3 15 2 30 0 0 16 l, .-, . . . . --. 2 21. . 3 Ot. 7 4.2 4 5.5 33 0 1 1.5 3 Gal. - 0 Ot. 7 14.7 4 11.3 36 0 1 l3.2 3 21. . 1 Ot. 8 9.3 5 2.2 31 0 1
!4.3 3 .41. . 2 Gt. 1 3.3 5 5.5 42 0 1
} 6.4 3 Gal. . 3 Ot. 7 14 5 14.3 45 0 1 l3 4 141. . O Ct. 10 9 6 5.1 43 0 1 l 9.5 4 kl . . 1 Ot. 11 3.5 6 11.4 51 0 1 l11.2 4 a.1 . 2 Ot 11 l14.1 7 1.! 54 0 1 f12.3
' j i 4 Mi. . 3 Ot. 12 { 3.6 7 5.1 57 0 ! l 11.4 g
' 5 141
. 3 ;; 13 l3.2 7 14.4 60 0 2 j 0 f
i t i I i
. , i . .
e D"n-
l l i ; 1 l PROCEDURE ! l EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER l REVISION l DATE i PAGE CPSES
, 1 JOB 35-1195 l l CCP-40 5 l 8/18/82 l 1 of 1 l ATTACHMENT 3 TABLE FOR PARTIAL MIXES OF NUTEC #1201 Maximum Base Cure Permissibl e Thinner Gai. Qts. Ibs.oz. Ibs.cz. qts, oz.
0 1 2 96 0 5.4 0 9.6 0 2 5 3.2 0 12.8 0 19.2 O 3 5 14.4 1 3.2 0 23.0 1 0 10 8 1 3 1 6.4
- I 1 13 1.6 1 14.1 1 16
, 1 2 15 11.2 2 4.E 1 25.0 1 3 18 4.8 2 11.2 2 3.2
- 2 0 20 14.4 3 1.E 2 12.3
- 2 1 23 3 3 0 2 22.4 2 2 26 3.2 3 14./ 3 0 2 3 23 12.8 4 3.2 3 9.6 3 0 31 6.4 4 9.6 3 19.2 3 1 34 0 5 0 3 28.8 3 2 36 9.6 3 6.3 4 6.4 3 3 39 3.2 6 12.0 4 16 4 0 41 12.3 6 3.2 4 25.6 4 1 4.? 8 I 8 5 3.2 4 2 57 0 E 14.a !5 12.0 4 3 49 11.2 7 14.0 5 22.4 3 0 52 4.8 7 11.2 ,6 0
- -, ,. _ ~ . , . _ , . , 4, _ . - _ _ ~ , , - , . - ~ . , , , , _.._m,- ._...~..-,r . . , , , ..-,_-,,..t-, . . _ , -
.e.
PROCECURE EFFECTIVE: BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES 6 JOB 35-1195 CCP 4C 5 8/18/82 1 of Z__ I "Q" Coating ATTACHMENT 4 Sheet of Procedure #
"Non-Q" Coating Rev. Oate ;
SPECIAL COATING PROCEDURE NO. SCOPE REQUIREMENTS: l 4 REFERENCE COCUMENTS APPROVALS ORGINATOR PROJECT C.E. l i TUGC0 QA l CONST. D.M. REY. DATE 6/24/83 CCP Rev. 5 DCil #3 Sheet 7 of 13
PROCEDURE ! ! ! l EFFECTIVE l BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER OATE PAGE l REVISION CPSES 6 JOB 35-1195 CCP 40 ! 5 8/18/82 i ! m 2 o f l._
-Sheet of ATTACHMENT 4 (Continued) Procedure 1 Rev. Date REQUIREMENTS (Continued) 4
. CCP-40 Rev. 5 OCN 3 6/24/83 Sheet 8 of 13 s.. . . . . , , . _ _ . . . . . . . . . . _
i l l PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE i
! BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE j 1
CPSES JOB 35-1195 ! CCP 40 5 10/14/83 1 of 5 l l
"Q" Coating X ATTACHMENT 5 Sheet I of Procedure # C "Non-Q" Coating Rev. 1 Date SPECIAL COATING PROCEDURE NO. C-1 SCOPE Arolication of NITTEC #10 concrete curing and sealing compound. - i 2
REQUIREMENTS: ,
.tefer to attached guidelines for application of NUTEC #10 and product data sheet.
i I REFERENCE DOCUMENTS APPROVALS _ . ORCINATOR fn 1 [A
'. PROJECT C.E. h~h ,
, TUCCO QA ./
, eussT. . [ h (2 M_M / a h d h.
xEv. I DATE/O'/d*$3 j i i CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #6 10/14/83 Sheet 2 cf 6 l
.' .'; 9.
l
~
?ROCEDURE EFFECTIVE
! SROWN & ROOT, INC. *1 UMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES l'
JOB 35-1195 - CCP 40 5 10/14/83 2 of 5 i ATTACHMENT 5 GUIDELINES FOR THE APPLICATION OF NUTEC #10 TO CONCRETE SUBSTRATES l i t 1.0 SCOPE l.1 Application on NUTEC 10 concrete curing and sealing compound. 2.0 SURFACE PREPARATION 2.1 " Green" Concrete . 2.1.1 " Green" concrete walls shall be cleaned by using compressed air to remove loose concrete and laitance. 2.1.2 "Creen" C.ncrete floors shall be lightly wirebrushed, followed by compressed air, to remove loose concrete and laitance. 2.1.3 Any forming' material transferred to the concrete shall be removed by wirebrushing. 3.0 APPLICATION PROCEDURE 3.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS 3.1.1 NUTEC #10 containers shall be stored at temperatures be tween 40*F and IlO*F and shall not be exposed to direct sunlight for ! a prolonged period of time. Temperatures may fall below or rise above normal storage tempera tures to 0 *F or 120 *F. i Respectively for an accumlative period of 14 days during Shelf life of the product. 1.1.2 The acount of tina required for curing increases with"dereasing temperature. An accelera tor may be added at tempera tures below 60 *F to facilitate the drying and curing peccesses. The 1ccelerator is - available in premeasured portions and shall be added as a third f component to the base-cure mixture. Accele ra tu re shall be utilized in accordance with manufacturing instructions. ! Cure times for NUTEC til0 is as follows: ~ i ST - 50
- F-69 ' F - 7 2 hou rs j 70*F-89'F - 24 hours l 90*F and above - L8 hours '
i CCP-40 Rev. 5 OCN e6 10/14/83 Sheet 3 of 6
- i 5
(-- . ._ PROCECURE EFFECTIVE
' NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE BROWN & ROOT, INC.
. CPSES i
J08 35-1195 _ CCP 40 5 10/14/83 3 of 5 i i ATTACHMENT 5 : I 3.1.3 All equipment used shall be kept in good condition and shall be comparable to the equipment listed in Section 3.2. 3.1.4 All equipment shall be cleaned properly before and af ter each ' use with the rcommended solvent (Imperial's DL-6A universal Solven t) . 3.1.5 NUTEC #10 Primer / Sealer shall not be applied under inclement ! weather conditions and not at surface temperatures below 50*F. j 3.1.6 Concrete to be coated shall be shaded. Epoxy coatings have a tendency to blister when exposed to direct sunlight. 3.2 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT 3.2.1 Airless 3.2.1.1 Use standard industrial spray equipment such as Graco, Binks, or Devilbiss using 30:1 pump ratio with 65-85 psi inbound pressure and a .016 to .0l9 fluid tip. j 3.2.2 Conventional > 3.2.2.L Pressure pot equipment with a water trap. I I 3.2.2.2 Separate atomi:ing air and fluid pressure regulator. 3.2.2.3 Air supply: Compressor capable of supplying a continuous volume of air at 60 to 80 psi to the nozzle of each gun. r 6 CCP-40 Rev. 5 0CN e6 10/14/83 Sheet 4 of 6
. i
' EFFECTIVE PROCEDURE l
' BROWN 1 ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35 1195 CCP 40 5 10/14/83 4 of 5 l ATTACHMENT 5 3.2.2.4 Recommended air hose - 5/16" or 3/8" I.D.
3.2.2.5 Recommended material hose - 3/S" or " I.D. 3.2.2.6 Industrial spray gun such as Binks #18 with 66 PB air cap, 66 fluid tip and 66 needle size or DeVilhiss MBC 60D. 3.2.3 Brush ; 3.2.3.1 A clean, high quality brush may be used to coat small areas or concrete inaccessible for spraying. 3.2.4 Roller 3.2.4.! A short to medium knap coller shall be used. 3.3 APPLICATION 3.3.1 Flush equipment with Imperial's #DL-6A Universal Solvent or imperials #DL-56 (Cellosolve) Solvent prior to use. 3.3.2 'tixing instructions - slowly mix by power agitation or by hand the
~
entire volume of the cure component with the entire volume of the base. If an accelerator is used, add thepremeasured portion { to the base-cure mix and mix slowly. Avoid rapid agitation which i may result in air entrapment. Do not vary proportions. , 3.3.3 Thin the NUTEC #10 mix with 10-40% #DL-56 solvent (Ce llosolve) . Thinning minimizes air entrapment, eliminates film irreglarities,
- enhances penetration, and prolongs the pot Life of the material.
I
; 3.3.4 As a guide, if using conventional spray, regulate the air pressure:
l 60-X0 psi to gun; 10-20 psi to pot. i NOTE: Required pressures may vary sith temperature .if hose length. ! l i I 8 I t
. . . l CCP-40 Rev. 5 OCN #6 10/14/83 Sneet 5 of 6 l
....- =_...
EFFECTIVE l PROCEDURE PAGE i l BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE CPSES 1 JOB 35-1195 l
- 1 CCP 40 5 10/14/83 5 of 5 !
ATTAClLMENT 5 ! l 1.3.5 As a guide, during spray application, apply material as a heavy, l we t coa t , in even, parallel passes overlapping each pass by 50% ; 3.3.6 Apply NUTEC #10 at a spreading rate of approximately 350-400 l sq. f t./ gal. Avoid excessive build up which will cause a
" glazing" affect after drying. .
3.3.7 NUTEC #10 has a pot life of approximately I hour (at 75*F). I No material shall be applied which has exceeded its pot life. If this has occured, there is an increase in the viscosity of ! the material, a noticeable heat of exotherm and applied material j. will " crawl" and refuse to penetrate the concrete. All material thus applied shall be removed fecm the concrete with solvent and a clean cloth. All equipment shall be cleaned immediately and any remaining NUTEC #10 (expired) shall be discarded. Caution: Storage of NUTEC #10 containers at high temperatures or in direct i sunlight will greatly reduce its pot life.
- NOTE: Po t life stated above for unthinned coating is the recommended [
tinae and should be used as a guideline for coating usage time, j however, actual po t life may be longer. For unthinned coating i or coating thinned less than 50%, the actual pot life is i determined by applicability of the coating. 3.3.8 During appIication all areas found to contain sags. surface
' irregularities, or excessive buildup of NUTEC #10 shall be removed with solvent and a clean cloth and f resh NUTEC #10 applied.
3.3.4 Flush Spray equipment periodically with Imperial's DL6A Solvent or DL-56 to avoid build up of material in the hoses. j 3.3.10 Clean up all equipment immediately following application wita t Imperial's #DL-56 eellosolve solvent or ;mperta t , ut-%
- Universal Solvent, l
I NOTE: l 1. Do not apply ETEC 8 L0 curin ; compound to <urfaces which ; i visible surface mois ture or standing water is present. .
! 2. Refer to w out o tures product dati sheet fEjene ral j information.
l
- 3. Material may be applied at tem pe ra tu res above 90*F. When l
, applications ar- made <t temperature, sov. w'F eare must !
I
; he taket r.i i e.a re pot 11:. m.t .
I i CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN d6 10/14/83 Sheet 6 of 6 g
. . . . . - - u ..........._....-.__._............._...,~.>....a. . . . . - .
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES b JOB 35-1195 CCP 40 5 8/18/82 1 of1
>Q
)
\ "Q" Coating X ATTACHMENT 5 Sheet 1 of Q
g Procedure # 7 Rev . 0 Date "Non-Q" Coating SPECIAL COATING PROCECURE NO. C-1 SCOPE Acolication of NUTEC 410 concrete curino and miino coucound. b O RECUIREMENTS: . Refer to attached guidelines for appif cation of NUTEC 110 and ! product data sheet.
't k A
M a; fev 0 , I l REFERENCE CCCt.'.YENTS APPRCVALS ORGINATOR PROJECT C.E. TUGC0 QA CONST. P.M. REY. DATE e
~
6/24/83 Sheet 9 of CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #3
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES _Q
.N 2 of 5 JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/ 18/8 2 N
\
NOh g ATTACHMENT 5 GUIDELINES FOR THE APPLICATION OF NUTEC #10 k TO CONCRETE SUBSTRATES A 1.0 SCOPE Q 1.1 Application on NUTEC 10 concrete curing and sealing compound. 2.0 SURFACE PREPARATION g 2.1 " Green" Concrete 2.1.1 " Green" concrete walls shall be cleaned by using compressed air to remove loose concrete and liatance. 2.1.2 " Green" Concrete floors shall be lightly wirebrushed, followed by compressed air, to remove loose coner nd laitance. atastany 2.1.3 Any forming material transf r t ec te shall be removed by wirebrushing. I, ' 3.0 APPLICATION PROCEDURE f 3.1 GEhERAL CONDITIONS . . 3.1.1 NUfEC #10 containers shall be stored at temperatures between 40 F and 1100 F and shall not be exposed to direct sunlight for a prolonged period of time. Temperaturees may fall balow 6 or rise above normal storage temoeratures to 00 F or 120 p, Respectively for an accumlative period of 14 days during shelf life of the product. 3.1.2 The amount of time required for curing increases with decreas-ing temparature. An accelerator may be added at temperatures below 60 0 F to facilitate the drying and curing processes. The accelerator is available in premeasured portions and shall be added as a third component to the base-cure mixture. Accelerature shall be utilized in accordance with manufacturing instructions. Cure times fo NUTEC 10 is as follows. ST - 500 f gg FF--72 hours 24 hours 700 90U F and above - 18 hours l l l
-_ 14C
~ Sheet 10 of 12 CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #3 6/24/83
1 PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. REVISION DATE PAGE
% NUMBER h CPSES \ JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 3 of 5 D
N ATTACHMENT 5 3.1.3 All equipment used shall be kept in good condition and shall be comparable to the equipment listed in Section 3.2. h 3.1.4 All equipment shall be cleaned properly before and after each use with the recommended solvent (Imperial's DL-6A universal k Solv ent) . k ( 3.1.5 NUTEC #10 Primer / Sealer shall not be applied under inclemgnt weather conditions and not at surface tempatures below 50 F. h 3.1.6 Concrete to be coated shall be shaded. Epoxy coatings have a tendency to blister when exposed to direct sunlight. 3.2 APPLICATION EQUIPMENT 3.2.1 Airless 3.2.1.1 Use standard industrial spray equipment such as Graco, Binks, or Devilbiss using 30:1 pump ratio with 65-85 p 1 bound pressure and a .016 to .019 fluid tip. l 3.2.2 Conventional 3.2.2.1 Pressure pot equipment with a wate$ap k h 3.2.2.2 Separate atomizing air and fluidssure pre %regulator. 3.2.2.3 Air supply: Compressor capable of supplying a continuous volume of air at 60 to 80 psi to the nozzle of each gun.
,'-- 5-G.
~
CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #3 6/24/83 Sheet 11of.13 _r.
1 l PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 4 of 5 ATTACHMENT 5 3.3.5 As a guide, during spray application, apply material as a heavy, wet coat, in even, parallel passes overlapping each pass by 50".. d 3.3.6 Apply NUTEC #10 at a spreading rate of approximately 350-400 sq. ft./ gal. Avoid excessive build up which will cause a
" glazing" affect after drying.
3.3.7 NUTEC #10 has a pot life of approximately 1 hour (at 75 F). D No materia ~ shall be applied which has exceeded its pot life. If this has occured, there is an increase in the viscosity of Q the material, a noticeable heat of exotherm and applied material will " crawl" and refuse to penetrate the concrete. All material thus applied shall be removed from the concrete with solvent and a clean cloth. All equipment shall be cleaned immediately and any remaining NUTEC #10 (expired) shall be discarded. Caution: Storage of NUTEC #10 contai a i tures or in direct sunlight will greatly reduc . , 3.3.8 Curing application all areas un c ta ags, surface
/52mec irregularities, or excessive il of UT 10 shall be %y '
removed with solvent and a c aan c th and fresh NUTEC #10 1, applied. 3.3.9 Flush Spray equipment periodically with Imperial's DL6A Solvent or DL-56 to avoid build up of material in the hoses. 3.3.10 Clean up all equipment immediately following application with Imperial's #DL-56 cellosolve solvent or Imperial's #DL-6A -~ Universal Solvent. NOTE:
- 1. Do not apply NUTEC #10 curing compound to surfaces which visible surface moisture or standing water is present.
- 2. Refer to manufactures product data sheet for general information.
/
j-CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #3 6/24/83 Sheet 12 of 13
~
j
~
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE l BROWN & ROOT, INC.. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE l CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 5 of 5 ATTACHMENT 5 3.2.2.4 Recommended air hose - 5/16" or 3/8" I.D. 3.2.2.5 Reconinended material hose - 3/8" or 1/2" I.0. 3.2.2.6 Industrial spray gun such as Sinks #18 with 66 PB air cap, 66 id tip and 66 needle size or Devilbiss MBC 600. U 3.2.3 Bru si.. 1 A clean, high quality brush may be used to coat small areas
%. 3.2.3.1 or concrete inaccessible for spraying, y 3.2.4 Roller Q A l~ m 3.2.4.1 A short to medium knap roller s 1 be;used!. F .'
3.3 APPLICATION
% 3.3.1 Flush equipment with Imperial's #DL-6A Universal Solvent or Imperials #DL-56 (Cellosolve) Solvent prior to use.
3.3.2 Mixing instructions- slowly mix by power agitation or by hand the entire volume of the cure component with the entire volume of j the base. If an accelerator is used, add the premeasured portion to the base-cure mix and mix slowly. Avcid rapid agitation which
." may result in air entrainment. Do not vary proportions.
3.3.3 Thin the NUTEC #10 mix with 10-40". #DL-56 solvent (Cellosolve). Thinning minimizes air entrainment, eliminates film irreg-larities, enhances penetration, and prolongs the pot life of the material. 3.3.4 As a guide, if using conventional spray, regulate the air pressure: 60-80 psi to gun; 10-20 psi to pot. NOTE: Required pressures may vary with temperature of hose length. I l i y-Z CCP-40 Rey. 5 OCN 13- 6/24/83 Sheat 11 nr 12
. P.ROCEDURE ~
EFFECTIVE NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE BROWN & ROOT, INC. CPSES I JOB 35-1195 i CCP-40 5 8/18/82 7 of 13 4.3 APPLICATION OF SURFACER & FINISH C0ATING l1 4.3.1 Surfacer Coat 4.3.1.1 Coating material shall be applied using a to ventional pressure pot-mastic gun arrangement. application on areas such as floors and for repair w el , [^ squeege or float application without the use of the mastic
;,, arrangement may be used. Under normal conditions, the concrete
; surface shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 28 days prior to
? application of protective coatings. However, if the coatings are
'l to be applied to pour backs, grouting, or patching to which NUTEC 10 has been applied as a curing x:ompound, coating may be performed
;" after a minimum of 6 days has elapsed from NUTEC 10 application time. Tie holes, and spalled concrete as defined in CEI-20 and
- patched per CCP-12, and grout under base plates wnich has 3 square
,i d feet or less of exposed surface to be coated, may be coated after 48 hours cure. Material shall be applied until the concrete
- surface is completely covered, with extra material being added to large holes or depressions. A single blade rubber squeege is then used to smooth out the material. Care shall be taken to
;---- eliminate as many pinholes as possible by use of a back and forth
. notion. Application parameters shall be as follows:
- 1. Minimum and maximum values of surface and ambient temperatures 0
shall 0be between 50 F and 100 F. Infrequent dips in temperature 0 to 40 F is permissible during application ang/or cure; however, the elapsed time the temperature is below 50 F shall be addad to the cure time. Application gf the coating shall not begin unless the surface temperature is 5 F above the dew point. Pot life shall be as stated in the chart below. M: i FOT UFE HR.S. g.s . . {? ' I ! . %=
% sc Go 70 EC 90 ICO TFf,PERPTURE *F
- 2. Humidity may vary as high as 100".; however, free standing water shall be removed. Coating application over a camp surface is permissibl e. Under no condition shall NUTEC 11S be applied to a surface containing' free standing water. Free standing water
[ may be identified by: l
- Tm CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #4 M 8/17/83 Sheet 2 of 2
l PROCEDURE , EFFECTIVE
'_ BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER ' REVISION DATE .
PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 . CCP-40 l 5 8/18/82l 7 of 13
. 4.3 APPLICATION OF SURFACER & FINISH COATING 4.3.1 Surfacer Coat 4.3.1.1 Coating material shall be applied using a bottom feed con-ventional pressure pot-mastic gun arrangement. To facilitate application on areas such as floors and for repair work, trowel, squeege or float application without the use of the mastic arrangement may be used. Under normal conditions, the concrete surface shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 28 days prior to application of protective coatings. However, if the coatings are j to be applied to pour backs, grouting, or patching to which NUTEC p 10 has been applied as a curing compound, coating may be performed f after a minimum of 6 days has elapsed from NUTEC 10 application g time. Tie holes, and spalled concrete as defined in CEI-20 and patched per CCP-12 may be coated after 48 hours cure. Material
] j shall be applied until the concrete surface is completely covered,
; with extra material being added to large holes or depressions. A
@ single blade rubber squeege is then used to smooth out the material.
Care shall be taken to eliminate as many pinholes as possible by use of a back and forth motion. Application parameters shall ( . be as follows: l
- 1. Minimum and maximum values of surface and ambient temperatures 0
! shall be between 500F and 100 F. Infrequent dips in temperature to 400 F is permissible during application and/or cure; however, the elapsed time the temperature is below 500F shall be added to the cure time. Application of the coating shall not begin unless the surface temperature is 50F above the dew point. Pot life shall be as stated in the chart below.
ao! FCTl.1FE HRS. ?.? . . lT_ IN i , 4 i _, , . _,
*C 50 Go 7o go go /co TEMPERPTURE *F
- 2. Humidity may vary as high as 100%; however, free standing water i
sha-ll be removed. Coating application over a damp surface is ! permissible. Under no condition shall NUTEC 11S be applied to a surface containing free standing water. Free standing water may be identified by: e l CCP 40 Rev. 5 DCN 47 Sheet 3 of 3
l 1 1 PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER , REVISION CATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CC P-40 5 8/18/82 3 of 13 3.0 SPECIAL ITEMS AND OPERATIONS 3.1 QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL 3.1.1 Coating Application Personnel shall be qualified per vious experience and/or demonstrated ability. In addition, I, each applicator shall have been certified by the Paint Dept. Superintendent or his repersentative per technical data and demonstrated ability. Application procedures shall be in g compliance with this procedure. This shall be verified by completing a form similar to Attachment I which will be exe-s cuted by the B&R Paint Superintendent or his representative. S A coating manufacturer's representative will be available ( ' for technical supervision upon initial painting effort. 03.2 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 3.2.1 All appropriate health, safety, and fire protection require-
._~.--
ments pertaining to surface preparation and coating applica-tion shall be followed. It shall be the responsibility of the
.. Safety Department representative who will be present to randomly
~
- , monitor safety during coating application.
N 3.3 INSTRUMENTS AND THEIR USE 3.3.1 The Painting Foreman and General Foreman shall have access to and be familiar with the use of thermometers, wet film gauges, and psychrometers for measuring relative humidity. Viscosity measuring devices will not be used. Wet film gauges will be randomly used during coating application; readings will be limited to the minimum necessary to control coating thickness. 3.4 DOCUMENTATION 3.4.1 Records shall be maintained on Attachment i listed in Section 5.1. After completion, the original will be forwarded to the Brown & Root Document Control Center for filing and distribution to the various parties listed on the distribution list.
*b l
e I PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 4 of 13 3.5 RECEIVING, STORAGE AND DISPENSING OF COATING MATERIALS. 3.S.1 Receiving and Storage 3.5.1.1 Upon receipt of a shipment of coating materials, the B&R QC Representative accepting shipment shall be responsible for completing all necessary receiving inspection documen-tation. General receiving procedures shall be in accord-and with Brown & Root Construction Procedure CP-CPM 8.1. It shall then be segregated from "Non-Q" materials and stored in the Paint Storage Building where temperatures will be 0 maintained between 400 F and 100 F. Rises in air temperature up to 1200 F is acceptable for as long as fourteen days. .(Ac-cumulative). Infrequent dips (for periods not to exceed 24 hours) in air temperature in storage areas as low as 33 F is acceptable; however, prior to gpplicJtion the coatings l shall be brought back into the 50 - 90" range. Temporary storage may be required at the Receiving Warehouse due to
..; receiving or other problems.
3.5;23 Dispensing , 2~ ~ 3.5.2 When coating materials are needed in the field, it shall be transferred from the controlled area to a designated temporary
- ,.> storage area or area of intended use in the field. Due to limited
~
shelf-life of coating materials, this shall be done on a "first-in" "first out" basis. Af ter materials have been partially used from an individual container, the said container cannot be resealed and returned to "Q" storage area for later use. Containers opened and partially distributed from the "Q" paint storage area may be resealed and the remaining contents used for "Q" painting. Except for thinners,! the contents from partially used conteiners shall not be reused ! ai-ir a period of 7 days has elapsed from date of initial opening. l 4.0 PROCEDURE 4.1 PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES AND C0ATING MATERIALS 4.1.1 Preparation of Surfacer 4.1.1.1 Nonnal surface preparation shall consist of water blasting with 4,000 P.S.I . to 10,000 P .S. I . Additionally, surface pre-i paration may be accomplished by the use of approximately 2,500 l P.S.I. water blasting with sand injection, acid etching with an Imperial recomended solution, or straight sand blasting. Any heavy oil or grease deposits shall be removed by steam cleaning, trisodium phosphate washing with a mixture of 3-6 pounds T.S.P. per gallon of water, or use of an Imperial recomended detergent. I i
=+we-a U_ = =y so. - _. . j.~_. .i.e. me .o .eo e 46 e we me , e- = .
, - _ .q- m.. , . . . ~ - - - - - ~ . . .
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION CATE PAGE CPSES I JOB 35-1195 l 5 of 13 CCP-40 i 5 8/18/82 Following surface preparation, the surface shall be free of construction dust, laitance, and loose deposits. If cleaning does not remove oil and grease, the contaminated concrete surface will be chipped away and patched before coating. All T.S.P. cleaned areas will be flushed with clean water. Holes or voids in the concrete surface that exceed 1/2" in depth shall be repaired with dry-pack or epoxy grout. Detrimental surface irregularities such as projections, fins, or ridges shall be reduced by bush-hammering, power grind-ing, or stoning. Wood particles of " fuzz" remaining after water blasting is acceptable. Recomended surface preparation shall include power tools which are capable of removing laitance and curing membranes from concrete surfaces. Markings on concrete - Before application of 115,11 or 1201, all
^
. 4.1.1.2
> markings (ink, pencil, chalk, or felt .tip markers) on wall and floors shall be solvent wiped in accordance with SSPC-SP-1 using
..J-
" DL-6A or commercially available MEK or Xylol. Marking paint (surveyor marks) shall be removed by solvent wiping, water blasting, C -
].
sandblastihg, or power tool cleaning. Discolored coatings due to aging or stains shall be abraded and solvent wiped to remove the discoloration. Residual marking or discoloration remaining in pores
, . .l below the plane of the surface is acceptable.
4.1.1.3 Repair of embedded foreign objects - Embedded foreign objects such as nails, rebar chairs, bolts, wood, or plastic shall be repaired per the following guidelines before application of NUTEC 11S sur-facer.
- 1. Objects protruding from the surface shall be ground or cut smooth until the object is flush with the concrete surface prior to application of 115.
- 2. If the object is loosely adhered in the concrete, it shall be removed (in case of wood splinters or wood " fuzz" an attempt shall be made to remove by high pressure water blast-ing). Refer to section 4.1.1.1.
- 3. Smooth' objects such as steel or plastic shall be roughened to provide adequate anchor pattern for the 11S surfacer. Metal objects shall be power tool cleaned to remove dust and mil scale and solvent wiped to remove any grease or oil.
l
-Eh-
' ~ I 1
]
PROCEDURE l EFFECTIVE -l BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES
- I !
JOB 35-1195 l CCP-40 5 l 8/8 l 13 of 13 NUTEC #1201. Damaged areas to concrete substrate larger than the above values shall be repaired with the normal coating system. 4.3.2.6 Treatment of Rust Stains - If the topcoat surface is contaminated with rust stains, the area shall be cleaned by use of bristle brush and water or solvent wiping with Thinner DL-6A. Any remaining stains not acceptable from a cosmetic viewpoint will be covered by a light overcoat of NUTEC #1201. 4.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4.4.1 Full cure of the coating system shall be maintained prior to testing
- and/or inspection for other than visual inspection. Final acceptance inspection may be performed, when visual inspection only is recuired, after topcoat has cured per paragraph 4.3.2.1(4).
After final inspection, and resolution of all discrepancies are com-pleted, the QC Inspector shall document the final acceptance by com-pleting and signing the Final Acceptance Record and will transmit ' O_ qi a copy of this record to the B&R Paint Superintendent as soon as possible af ter final acceptance is made. ( g- ,
.y$;S HOLD POINTS g 4:5 31 On-site receipt of coating material, y y 4.5.2 Substrates befor , preparation if blasting or bush hammering is to be m utilized and following all methods of preparation.
453 Mixing and preparation of coating material for application. 4.5.4 Film characteristics after drying and curing. 4.5.5 Control of ambient conditions and surface temperatures during all phases of the coating work. 5.0 SUPPORTING INFORMATION 5.1 ATTACHMENTS
- 1. Painter Qualification Record
- 2. Table for Partial Mixes of NUTEC 11S
- 3. Table for Partial Mixes of NUTEC #1201 -
5.2 REFERENCES
- 1. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-AS-31, " Protective Coating" Latest Revision
- 2. Steel Structures Paint Council, Vol . 2, Second Edition
- 3. Imperial Data Sheet NUTEC #11S and NUTEC #1201, Dated 7/77
- 4. NACE Publication T-6F-4 l M
CCP-40 Rev. 5 DCN #1 1/11/83 Sheet 3 of 3
}
. . . ~
- PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES ,
JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 6 of 13
- 4. Metal objects larger than four square inches shall be l coated with an inorganic zinc primer in accordance with CCP-30.
- 5. Objects which are recessed to a depth greater than 1/2" shall be repaired using a " dry pack" or epoxy grout.
[' 4.1.1.4 Surface appearance - Surface smoothness'or " glossy" appearance in concrete walls will not be detrimental of NUTEC 11S, provided the surface is fre o nce se, laitance, efflorescence, curing membranes s
]j(.
as outlined in this procedure. b
' ~
4.2 PREPARATION OF C0ATING MATERIALS 0 4.2.1 Surface Coat 4
$- 4.2.1.1 The surfacer, NUTEC #11S, is packaged, in a three component kit consisting of a base, curing agent, and filler. The I ha base and curing agent shall be thoroughly mixed first. If (w m necessary, box the mixture to assure that all the base and cure has been used. The filler shall then be slowly added l E -
ci under constant agitation and mixed until a smooth blend is achieved. The patching material, NUTEC #11, is prepared the p -_e same way. Partial mixes for Nutec #11S shall be in accor- -h dance with Attachment 2. A ~ < - . 4.2.2 Finish Coat 4.2.2.1 The finish coat, NUTEC #1201, is a two component epoxy top- I coat consisting of a base and cure. These shall be thoroughly mixed under constant agitation until a homogenous blend is achieved. Partial mixes of NUTEC #1201 shall be in accor- l dance with Attachment 3. Minimum induction times shall be as follows: TEMPERATURE F INDUCTION TIMES 50-59 45 min. 60-69 30 min. 70-79 20 min. 80-90 10 min. , 91-100 NONE i e
= - - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . - - - . - . . .
1
. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & R00T, INC. NUM3ER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 7 of 13 4.3 APPLICATION OF SURFACER & FINISH C0ATING 4.3.1 Surfacer Coat 4.3.1.1 Coating material shall be applied using a bottom feed con-4 ventional pressure pot-mastic gun arrangement. To facilitate
,, application on areas such as floors and for repair work, trowel, 1 squeege or float application without the use of the mastic i arrangement may be used. Concrete surface shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 28 days prior to application of material. Tie
(,) holes, and spalled concrete as defined in CEI-20 and patched per g CCP-12 may be coated after 48 hours cure. Material shall be applied until the concrete surface is completely covered, with extra mat-( erial being added to large holes or depressions. A single blade rubber squeege is then used to smooth out the material. Care shall
$ be taken to eliminate as many pinholes as possible by use of a back and forth motion. Application parameters shall be as follows:
- 1. Minimum and maximum values of surface and ambient temperatures
% shall be between 500F and 100 F. Infrequent dips in temperature to 40 F is permissible during application and/or cure; however, the elapsed time the temperature is below 500 F shall be added to
. the cure time. Application of the coating shall not begin unless the surface temperature is 50 F above the dew point. Pat life
- shall be as stated in the chart below. Mi. FoiUFE HRL o.s . . 1.zs . I.0
- c. s n- , ., , + -,
40 50 Go 70 80 40 ICO TEt1PERPTURE *F .
- 2. Humidity may vary as high as 100%; however, free standing water shall be removed. Coating application over a damp surface is permissible. Under no condition shall NUTEC 11S be applied to a surface containing free standing water. Free standing water may be identified by:
l
Men PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE I BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES , i JOB 35-1195 l CCP-40 l 5 8/18/82 12 of 13
- 4. Recoating time of NUTEC #1201 is 24 hours. l
- 5. Tack free time is as follows:
TEMPERATURE OF TACK FREE TIME 50 8 hrs. 60 4 hrs. 80 2 hrs. 100 1 br.
- 6. Full cure time is as follows:
~'s g
- % TEMPERATURE OF FULL CURE TIME f...
_ l 50-59 60-79 11 days 8 days 2h 80-99 7 days 100 5 days
#1201 may be subjected to personnel foot 0traffic after 24 hours at or above surface temperature of 80 F. At temperature durations below 50 F little or no curing will take place, there-fare, af ter coating, maintain temperatures above 50"F. ]
4.3.2.2 Repair of Runs and Sags - Runs or sags showing evidence of crack-g ing must be removed. Runs or sags inside Service Level 1 areas which exhibit no other coating defects, shall be abraded to the
@ thickness of adjoining coating. Runs or sags outside Service Level 1 areas which exhibit no other coating defect need not be removed.
{ bi 4.3.2.3 Repair of Embedded Foreign Particles - Embedded foreign particles shall be removed by abrading. The area shall then be given a 1ight
' overcoat of #1201. Any loose particles shall be removed by brush-ing, vacuum, or compressed air.
4.3.2.4 Repair of Pinholes and Discontinuities - Any loose particles shall be removed by brushing, vacuum or compressed air. The pinholes and discontinuities shall then be repaired by use of a brush or squeege. 4.3.2.5 Repair of Scratches and Damaged Areas - Any scratches or damaged areas shall be abraced by hand or power tool cleaning or spot blasting until loosely adherent particles are removed. If the damaged area extends to concrete substrate and is " or less in I diameter, the damaged area may be coated with NUTEC #1201. If the damaged arel extending to concrete substrate is greater than
" in diameter by 2 sq. inches or less in an area, the area may be repaired with NUTEC #11 with a topcoat of NUTEC #1201. Damaged j areas to concrete substrate larger than the above values shall be repaired with the normal coating system.
m
... ~ _ ... _ _ .. _ .. _.
PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE BROWN & ROOT, INC. NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES JOB 35-1195 CCP-40 5 8/18/82 13 of 13 4.3.2.6 Treatment of Rust Stains - If the topcoat surface is contaminated with rust stains, then area shall be cleaned by use of bristle brush and water or solvent wiping with Thinner DL-6A. Any remain-ing stains not acceptable from a cosmetic viewpoint will be covered by a light overcoat of NUTEC #1201. l 4.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING 4.4.1 Full cure of the coating system shall be maintained prior to testing and/or inspection for other than visual inspection. Final accept-ance inspection may be performed, when visual inspection only is required, af ter topcoat has cured per paragraph 4.3.2.1(4). After final inspection, and resolution of all discrepancies are completed, the QC Inspector shall document the final acceptance by completing and signing the Final Acceptance Record and will trans-mit a copy of this record to the B&R Paint Superintendent as soon as possible after f.inal acceptance is made. 4.5 HOLD POINTS ( 4.5.1 On-site receipt of coating material. - 4.5.2 Substrates before preparation if blasting or bush hammering is to be utilized and following all methods of preparation. 4.5.3 Mixing and preparation of coating material for application. 4.5.4 Film characteristics after drying and curing. 4.5.5 Control of ambient conditions and surface temperatures during all phases of the coating work. 5.0 SUPp0RTING INFORMATION 5.1 ATTACHMENTS
- 1. Painter Qualification Record
- 2. Table for Partial Mixes of NUTEC 115,
- 3. Table for Partial Mixes of NUTEC #1201. l
5.2 REFERENCES
- 1. Gibbs & Hill Specification 2323-AS-31,
" Protective Coating" Latest Revision
- 2. Steel Structures Paint Council Vol. 2, Second Edition
- 3. Imperial Data Sheets NUTEC #11S and NUTEC #1201, Dated 7/77 l
- 4. NACE Publication T-6F-3
.c 1 1 1 Attachment E QI-QP-ll.4-17, Rev. 6 (June 17, 1983)
REVISION PAGE TEXAS UT1UTIES GENERATING CO. N SER O QI-QP-11.4-17 ' 6 f 1 of 3 JUN 17 1983l PREPARED BY: fy/(([ M # 4/#3 SURVEILLANCE OF / OATE STORAGE AND HANDLING ,f f 0F PROTECTIVE C0ATINGS APPROVED BY: # M/7/ M APPROVED BY:
)
DATE
/')
- 1. 0 REFERENCE 1-A CP-QP-18.0, " Inspection Reports" 1-B CP-QP-16.0, "Nonconformances" l-C CCP-30, " Coating Steel Substrates Inside Reactor Building and Radiation Areas" 1-D CCP-30A, " Coating Steel Substrates Inside Reactor Building and Radiation Areas" .
1-E CCP-40, " Protective CJ lg fa 1-F CP-CPM-10.3, " Application of the Thermo-Lag Fire Protection System" 1-G CCP-13, " Concrete Curing" 2.0 GENERAL 2.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE ! The instruction delineates methoos utilized on Quality Control personnel in inspection of storage and handling of protective coatings. 3.0 INSTRUCTION 3.1 INSPECTION Protective Coatings QC shall perform monthly surveillance of the Class I and Class 11 protective coatings storage facilities. Ambient temperature of each storage facility will be monitored with an automatic temperature recording device. A weekly temperature recorder chart shall be attached to Attachment 1. The following items will be verified as part of the monthly surveillance:
INSTRUCTION ISSUE FAGE REVISION TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. QI-QP-11.4-17 6 .10N 17 1983 2 of 3
- a. Verify that the temperature of the storage facility is maintained as follows:
- 1. Protective coatings per References 1-C,1-0,1-E -
between 45*-100 F with infrequent dips in temperature to 33*F for up to 24 hours are acceptable.
- 2. Thermolag materials p*er Reference 1-F - 330-1 and 351-2 between 35*-100 F and 350 between 35*-120*F.
- 3. NUTEC 10 per ' Reference 1-G - between 40*-110*F
, and maximum accumulative period of 14 days for temperatures between 0 * -40 *F and 110*-120*F.
- b. Verify that no containers are leaking or damaged.
- c. Verify that storage records indicate that the "first-in first-out" issuance is being followed.
- d. Verify that all labels are leg'ible and contain product identification, manufacturer s name, date of manufacture, and batch number.
- e. Verify that shelf life is not expired.
- f. Verify that all Class I and II coating materials are segregated from others. ,
- g. Verify that the area is reasonably clean and containers are stored in orderly fashion.
3.2 DOCUMENTATION The above inspections shall be recorded on an Inspection Report (IR), Attachment 1, in accordance with Reference 1-A. 3.3 NONCONFORMANCES Nonconforming conditions shall be reported in accordance with Reference 1-8. l TUGCO OA
. ~ _ - - . - .- . - . , - . .
_ c- _ - _- - - - - _ _ _ . _.y _
.y ,,--- ,- ---.m-- ,
l
. i INSTRUCTION ISSUE N DAM TEXAS UTluTIES GENSATING CO.
CPSES QI-QP-11.4-17 6 .llW I 7 883 3 of 3 ATTACHMENT 1
*CasANCME PON STEAM EECTRIC S TATICN g 9 INFECTION MEPORT ,
'N --rROTECTIVE COATING af l'-""*"" 3 e
stonAfJ 1 atAINTrwAmer no. w- a rm ser.oursa upsc.na gav. jour ac, occ. a esv. e e-- a si eI0l-OP-ll.4-17. Rev. 7 nom CI"Ma CQN'hh$s"" C Yse$di* nom sepection ,
.an asma.ra O ano c-o , aiA a, ucams item s rwacron ** '"'"*" ""
O .=nem co-urto. ==.nw cta= ina uma asu= ,, e I carg INSPECTION ATTA100TES ; ,,,",$,y,g
,2
- I i3 I
1 I Teeoe n ture nutnpatean mae pnen 1 1 n I !
- 2. ITemocrature recordino charts attar %ed eer Par _ 1.1 '
- 3. t Containers not leaking or damaged per Para. 3.1.b
- 4. I' Storace records show "First-In:First-Out" oer Para 11.c_
- 4. labels are leqibia oer Pars. 1.1.d
- 6. Shelf life not eroired Der Para. 7.1.e
- 7. Coatings secreqated from all other oer Para.1.1.f
- 8. Area reasonably clean per Para. 3.1.9 menaams tones, specs.tTeJ 6
l
\
O l M'.a rto u n = . ,, n ifa CLOSED " -8'emarwe s- oc ases .? n , i TUGCO CA 1 l
= = = = = - . . - . . . . _ . . . . .. * ,
** e e . + . .
w..m- , . . - . , m - . :.----- - - - -
Attachment F Sample coatings storage surveillance reports
. . . . _ _ _ . . .. ...g COMANCHE PEAK . STE,LM E: ECTRIC S TATION sperT 3
- cP I. -
,- INSPECTION REPORT m g g p g, im oEsCAIPflCNPROTECTIVE C0ATING iozNmCAmM Mc s m / smCm cEssNAmCN l 1
STODAGE & MAINTFNANrr 2 N/ 3 d+ b O Add- d)APA Anu 4/-
- l SPEC.ac. aEV. REF. Q.C. CCC. & AEV. & CHANGE MO. MGSVREp TEST yutP. iOOT 30.
s / s 01-0P-11.4-17, Rev. $ 7 /Ad9 Mj78 s_ l h P9eCE35 C PRE INSTALLAT10N [(N$TALLAT CN [ p;NAL ] PRETEST
- INSPECTICM VERIFICATICN INSPECT 1CN INSPECT 10N INSPECT 1cN 9 l' iMsP. RESULTS
!MMCT!aN CoMPLETEo , ALL APPUCASLE ITEMS SAT 18FACTORT g ((gC[p O inspection Co=PozTEo, unsATisrACroaf irtus usTEo sEtow / ' *c""*7#
' 8 INSPECTION ATTRIBUTES ; 5 ga7g ,,,,"ATunt
~
es 12 * '3
- 1. Temnarattive maintainori nor Dava 1 1 a Y I 2. Temperature recordino charts attached Der Par. 11 V l l' 3. Containers not leaking or damaged per Para. 3.1.b V l
; 4. l Storace records show "First-In:First-Out" Der Para 3.1.c ~v '
I
<; _ labels are leoible per Para. 3.1.d V
- 6. Shelf life not expired per Para. 3.1.e v-
- 7. Coatinos segregated from all other per Para. 3.1.f v' y
- 8. ; Area reasonably clean per Para. 3.1.g V l RamAnns (owes, SPECS, ETc.)
48/fM//f/765 ~ ~
/dvf- buo be- 7/es/o s ll\ FORMAT;Oi\
nm-n " - 9p/as
- , V'
.- - p m...... .,o ,,, BPLoo
- RTN FILE LOC.
j L 17.1.99.3 -_ g$ - suarn.s Loc. SOOlPC #
$DE.
og5* 2 4
"II #
/
h '
- 1. R. C1.CSED Q i
N-iSIGNATuas 8 (C ;NSPECTCR
!6
- .= _ _ - - _ _ - - - - _____^ __- _ n% "awnu--- .
.,, : . .d .N N - NITE 6%
59
/ gg ,.
s-
+:--
' m,
' Pg%o s
Wr - ~ R, N Y MWV nhN=f &,% 8 , M<{. r
,j s,. . ' - ':h - smm+,N h a%
</g#_ +'
. Wsat ,: 0/ ./.
. n
.+. _
x&g:::m o. ' : t :,n s 2 i i . / 3./ x{. c x
$ 'll } 1 ' j':/ ' 'y X _ g ~.Qy[q
! I
'l+. /
/ u. g.~. hz. .
' :^ ' N i
(.=- g. ,- ,. ?
.j{y
-f ~+:Ly,. f-l'~ :l n
' / '/ f,,
Q. 'W.-f ,
'_.a ,, <- ,i_... ~ .m e
@ q o.1 .OL 0C5kf" ' .
'\ '.,1 5I . , \ -)
.\ ' .\ ,/ . '+ . .\ '
1
.NI N- N[ fy' Y, y
~
- 05?Wk@ wg&m?, ilg4 $4 wxy:/ $5E gVwm
( Q(x mgg Qj
, m:::.
' g ;: f f 3; h _ ,.:7:A Q .- . 1
; m .;, [ .~. - } w ? w} $l' / n y: -
y' = a;;. -
.., L - :: y.-ggr, y pq:%!;.":::r.; p;g.;; g .
- y. .
g
. '. - . ~, y, .h
- d.t :r,,..[q :'.:ii i s.
- 7 : .:: t .a . . . .
;l ji f'. ~
* ~ -}
A f,' _y
,_. _ l
. .:= s: ., m
- . . s: %my f.;
' . ,;.nw. p ... 1. --
. : ! k g; N . p .J T^x . M .,2 f /
__- i_ , - ; k E= , .' .
~
N
.f: jfE l .
- y.
- n , . - . .
= . ,
p , . U" w.. "
. N.. :w' .' -
D
.,.:.. n.s u . ~
- . z-M -
u 1 . d.--~ .
.~
~~-1 -
., _ .- }
AVONOW -. s------- _ l ; 1
patO4y 6 AM 6 'N 5 fi --
.w.
, f0
+' -; l$ ]
[ i
~'
-;;( ' ggi .~.
- s. .
x . uw' .
*':j 6 Y' - ' '
g 's ! {.
*~
x f40'- , g., ~
- i. l 5+ - }; ~' %
[ fi,,d .
? '2, ,f ' 's '
///
f h/ i ^ YZ l ~y - sn . sM. , .DRh. p j. N '
. ~ Qthhj Ds m 9 dis li t-h, 9,n[:<:=,/7[ , k j
'\
- l
'ig ;F(gVl* -
w...p,4 3 a n
-yw.
u~v .1.. g=-fp (:w;;;;;- srmA . a wwp/. Ser V w,9. 9 c w w> /.
..\ .)
.p: w
.e
.y + - 9 ~3 0 ~ v r -+
L, 7 f + ,,
'h gy; ki.h ;(;l.y qggypp .
i "f '
, 3 3 N a f 9%;k @s ci r& %
umQ(ue.'4Mg ; M.. W\agdp " < - .
, 5 a u'WhM#
NO W c -x- h) J bud 9 3MN h l ..*y- ,5 's * ' _g f_ r
, wil.f Ii'YL M '. 'S f Y WWf:w:f gwy. _ Aft
- 7 g . ,
l pM I ' WEDNESDAY m 64y Nf l 1 y . -. = l '* f l i v
- x. ,
g . t~ w ,.
- 41. X_ .M.agQ.:%u .
-$ / .
t .' F> . p
- /. ..\\. .
- w. .
sN.r\-[', , . % e~ ~ ~: I 'i '$;
- . - '/.~'-
. t.
f. 1 N , 4 "q-@ y- . K .. .
/x- .
([ ' M, ;;ww,w.., w?s . s gy y-av .-
-~
m .
, ; * ,_.. .' . 9 n Rz P M ;m
'c :'8 , ..t:i
- i 9.N i :<.
- 6. , .h -w&;' y Y wy sy
%] X
\ A: \o-x.8
' \
.. N ^. %
~
'b
; l :l -.A k . 'y '
[y+ / / p t w.. ,,: r %'q! i3l,':,r
, s p',p/< .. m syn
.c
'.cf .f_'.ye% bA . ..f x.m u . .
,g m
~.
a
/, .
A - nm,.y cs - f ~.
~
pyy g, y,
- t :.,_ .(yj4;,s.7
. . _e#.1p-.
s
. s,_ _ _ . g _ p. .$
Q$ / '\
/
\/ '
'l . f';'s N .
-l A hl,',z'
,'\
~
ti %
.- s'
?.\.'v ss< y yfogNA/;. f*fi Se u~
5 u . ..d.n ng? @ i g ,a .
, ~
fi ,,/ah ly .. -/_ - /* 7
} ', ,t ' '\ .Y ,
I i$ _
,Y Y-)?.D
; T\/N[k\jh
2
.; swg wa % N ' 4['
N,Q +Q Q i; %: W W W wf$$$Wh$ g
.M;.g
@%,,g :ymm -aw Lyt 4
% 2.v. ,.. :v. v.s.e. x. %- .
y- - >,
+-.+-<,..; .a,.;
Nd9 y4 4g 311N
~~~
7 f
'o
4 6 PM MONO 4y pin ,T \
'.z e q
.g
\
1 f. ,p . -
.-p l N
- ff 8 .\ ~ 4l h %_ /%
cQ$ %., 1 . h6h, f w x
. .en . w , m l l } ,x 'l I I
.~.:4. } / ,/ n &l' f \ p yi 'xlh;i)-t\QW e,o
~.
/
/c . c . . .
m
/,bx' .'%
t gfy-t- , , ... - ..
- 7. .
x, y'b ._ p,. +;. m ~es. e
,i y'
- '+9 i
~f, -
KWo! ;O.i ' ' r g' ' ) '
- y. /I W' ;/s;x ,' 'lX
,/\ ,
~ ^ ^
., < ? l,:.J /
,/ . , ,
l'V b\y/ '^ g \ p : Q',y[<:,/ ' 3 . --
. .(;;;.
- f f f h l.: f f ? ql l ; W X [ s & - o&' W gy f m
.gj3 ; :
33 .
.. z yp)f
, . .;y..., .
-; s ,,' s+ .' y s n r g' ~0 2'67 -
+ ' , p,v;;c< e 1o/ : .
-s Q T.:' ' q>-
W[:f o-*'.{VT ;f) +f.
}$ /l
$. y ,&u}-f'i L-. m*,4f j I '
la'
-[-
7 4
-i x
',.ql.5 My sX \js N!! u.e : -\%. ,]gM-yk u
+:: 7:
4 u p - Q W/g [s%. R ., :.4 [ l/ - o Fl w + - W. % : y . :. ' de ': ve{<o N..%w1 w h' f x..s
'lis
.n N
t .. tr1 - t X' ' s s:* s g ~..c w +
. , . ,. .'s
' + 4. . . . .
- f ~./
c' -
-\ '
l hk'hh.~4 a sq"w- wehh'2 h ntuw
- a m y 9
~~N.k$kkk _,
. go,
_ _ - . _ _ _ - - _~ .- .. . -- _ _ -
. - .. --..-..;.,n- -
ObMANCHE PIAM '. $TE M' Ei.ECTRIC STATICN i
. m.ar- 1 er 1 INSPECTION REPCRT Nog /g f p g /,
C'* " '" iTu oEscam"PR0TECTIVE C0ATING 3M
""" "N/A.75 "'- , 'Yf4t Al V O Tn D$1 A ADGLonts
& Ad /' "L*6 "
STORAGE L HATNTVNr.Nrr 1 srtc Mo. aEv. as,. e.c. occ. a esv. a enanes 30. mAswas,am imjever. iosjsao. s / e 01-0P-11.4-17. Rey, d 7 /g dY R $ 7/3 33 7d3 t o a P(C oN fCN 9 , 86SPE ON C
. 68e4P. AESULTS hlNSECTION COtsplETED , ALL Af8UCASLE 1798 SAT 18 FACT 0aY jjya/ A///A S
/ TC~ ile8PECTOR ' ' oATE OinseCTiese coisat Tan, unsarismcfoa7 iTuas unTra eston v 4 )
[I gg INSPECTION ATTRISUTES t2 44 OATg gg ,479,g 83 i i 1 Tamnarature maintain-d nar pa ra 1 1 m 1
- 2. Temoerature recordino charts attached oer Par. 11 V l
- 3. ll Containers not leaking or damaged per Para. 3.1.b V 4 ' Storage records show "First-In:First-Out" cer Para 3.1.c V
- 5. Labels are 1ecible oer Para. 3.1.d
/ l l 6. Shelf life not exoired per Para. 3.1.e V i
- 7. Coatinos segregated from all other oer Para. 3.1.f V
, 8. I Area reasonably clean per Para. 3.1.g L/
.A j as=Aa's town. wies. Tea 7 m /Na ttf / 9 6 3
; 1 l .; /e/r-Je&re-/o/es/es bFORMAT 0K :
) 3s276 !! I'
/0/Ja/$S l
, 3278 '! //
f/Qf5 PQ'h)3[ , $ l ll 3PW
.. = - . .-
PERM. PLT. RECORD l
,, vu ,x--
j ARMS * ~ 5UBFILE L OL. INDEXED SOOlPC # ;
- i -
DATE: i ! i i E. l
"# '4 RI U TIQ 80CA1p/# ,, u. casco a g4. .tTc ,i.,.~ m ,. e~,,, = . ,
- / i
? Y
! :/
_ . . . . - . _ _ _ _ . ~ . _ . _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . , . . . . _ . . . . _ _ _ , -
l l
"r --] . _ _ .
l l N I-E 6 99 6
^\ -\
j , ~hq ' k4P g G P '/. - ' e '. ,. M : Nx ;Q dAs- s O s - \ m\ ' ' % .x'N x' s y (, p ., ~ l
~ _
~I 3 .
N / 'y .
k/'<x1[p-,~[' x V ,[ pmr. q/ ' n\ . SW.- Q.;s o.el % X 'Nb hs, \ Q,,/~Q.,c. ;:.y S t - y a[/[ [ XWw .[ ['Vii Q $'N[ p/. / yn. ' l g/Q 4./,( vlrs,m/X X ye % yNxx < Q) m'Q y 4. N s t
.. :.j...z.fz 7 ... /
- x~/zww x/ g x .@n... sQ~.v ,x,,
r
/
, ~a .. ..Ng. y< ., .y s, y /
,a v, ,
,y .y 3 n- /- . y w 7~ .._ eN,' 'g:<' ~) o . e g:. . . . N' ,
g
,.q ,
, ; ,V 6 ,t
,,b.
a Q' ; %,0> a' DQJQ+%g*S qi g$m-tm m . g.
. /. . .." ,'\ & ' _'.,f; g ,.,e rl:.i. [ *:.l M
- ,y. % y/;Q-:,-\
.y,.
. s s,.s y' f ?p)v%:/,m -
. Ng ..n t--}- y p'y',Q',s
. . ; y , Q % ')ff. 9 / Q : ' $ l 3
' 7E E / d f i / C f ,j... '
+4 iLxppfn-
- u. ,9.. .~ . m^ u . -
; P .'
x x p: >,: x;Is;lt:.l-i ;
'.cs /N:,
. ;K~;y v x .
- n m A
/ .,.n : /. a . i ;,
i g0, z, n- .. - , s
' , -*---n
. 'b; . ' . ./ Qg,s / '~/s -/- /. . _- _ /- g
"/v ' 7-Y k'N /N> s [/~-l:,jf .w
.N kiL \: .\ '. [ MhVMJ'I [1
, .N /
n l 7; 1;
, \ -
^
. -4 -
g \ -
' f_. . j
< ^#
~ l i: % 9 \ f,N. ..,
. > c N,:m : % . +S 3
. . ':/'..
- c. ,
q 3d f . , t .'I
', . N/
%[M,m'.'5hvg. 1
' ,,X.MX,'[ w
' ' ?.'ll g: M fy.'; '
D9 pONOH
- m - '
. T s A . .- . . .
. , ,, .g
* -7
, 'k 3r.; : . ., ; ._ ,: l
"'. < ; Q ;
- l. ' .g T 4( , . ' f < .*. o ~ #7 m
. g 'T , 39
,.y'
, g .
k g[.,
.j ' 1
.f: [ ; i
,f-{. /p 4 ..t: h, t -: ge. SATUROAY wl: $ ' .
pe 6 49
- s. L fi , \
-m
. q . h %p
., ?. . .. . . ,. to4, .
N rc' -% 4 c
.c
.w .
.- ,..,S/, ;.2.-.
(o u- y xx s..y g .- . V
- u.o% ~ ,N
~ ~ . N.;s m['N 4 . . ,
p .#
.- .,* . ;f?
._ y X.- - cf '
('rsh ' . \. - Q[N.l 'N N s..' '/ l
.- t .. g . 7,. y' --
3 ;s-N /h zg c,gyfg : ,yy g w.jys 'pg ( .
, ~ bh '
4, m~ ;: n.gy, x x ge c w m n sx; 3g y m.
,.- . _ ,e:.n,.. ..gg y' g ; h- z, w,,,q.?), y s wK,,c:. \/wa wl-+,r-T f-t3.
.,t. _ _- ,. o, s
, - + .' - v ++ -,/..
.;j, / _~
,A
. p. fd .
,n. ' .x .
/ . \; ,p); ' qh j~i
,e
- l y :x
'K: %
<y
\'
f
< \
.\,.
i
\_/y k' a- ,
r
?
r 1 s * .y:.)gy, . - ~ , x . 3,- ,
'2: y \,
,< \ / ' \ ,(,. .
x: x '.
? ~. *-
; k. ' ""i' s- 1 y
..s ,
'[ b .
,,E' x../ 'c ' . , ' ***~~ ' = 0::'~ . f ,,- )N /
Q .. g. . . '( '
, ; g .N, x.'* .vy - , x4,'%s i, ,a... , . .*, . >..\* -. ,P;*1 / y:
j .s . w . :g;- 3 1 - Z- 1 .,f* % c. , ' *
- +-~ - % {. n' l h'? ..xf .'- c ."', m L. , i. ,
< .' .J.
, . a. 'k , . 'p-, .g 4.g ,y- T...-c j
+
x ' .: ,
, , y., s- Q'3\ -\.. ,..'y^
1 6 . t' ', W* n KWi2,y&,g. .i -
}
- W<. M . . : .< o / \ . / *,
(; ~ ,
\.'1; f.v'; . j._f ..A.\ ; '\./[;j;.',./.
; ; c r ' ,' '*t t ,/l ? , ,
=.
lC
-e; t M-T b- ).
,=2: x 41 3; 1 y ,,' }r! y' 1 . , ; .
< /,
- g r --
f k g> A ,+ +p0 (* Ll '3%JA j I/,
.c .
,, 7
& f '\..k'Cf :1:
) C ? y-8 Q\
m i 4 #. ; . 1- y ; y;Q< 3. . ; . .s,;^, Q f&)llw,,d%::$ogf
' . ,f.
/
, pp M. W::.;; ;_ M p ,
, p-r y .
,\ . . ' , X>. .. )v'
.N - '
x s N. k ;,
.. '- . q, Q'
~,, ,t - i.
.s. -
,e
~.;x ;,j i: .,; ; M. . , -
v Y , .s ; x s ',/ \. . -
- s. s a .' .y /y . , __
4
\
.L \ :-
,X- Q'y
'\, :/ ,
y .c
'y N ~l M .. ~
'+;' f l g y j. g' , ' F ^1+ h-l . ./. L- ...,l.i... .
, s 9. :.
...'_ .\ ; y , , (
x ,e x A' i' 4
. % , ! ' ':.%,' y.' yN/ Ev a p*,o y .s.. .s ,A, s,
.&c . 3. '% . ..t
- ; .e$x ,N,-
v, ~ y' - [N
/~./ . ;j. . . x,r,-.,,
'g,;' ' /i
, ~ .
. r ./ x
'b'3
\' , 'e . I <,'N /~'
Nj O . g Mep N: .\ ~ m : y ., V ' is' .; ;, i
'ys 'N [ m'
'. N ,, ',fN *
'M k s N,'. '
^7' 4
[/ \,/,ri , v, ' [ , s ',
, . ,,g., ..,'E. ..'.~. j ' y[,7
[ A ldy u i'~ ,
'\, -
[ , f
<,t ,y N p t x
.n . -
c .yo -
- s. .
'd
~
l
, -k .
7
,/... * * -
(' %s }M swis w ..2
\
Q\f.. ..
.Ql f < % a % p= -.s w
- e %, af Ay w x. -
3MN g. 4
we., 1
=
.mmu 6 PM
.e
, .,,,3. --
, - 04y
' ' 1
- ' e 6 >* ,g, . M. , . ' , % -- . .
4,4
,/ > . 'ex.-V ,
C*. , l .. u l: Aw
/ V X 'cf A .\ 9 g,. .
1 a %:M m ' 4 's w s
. ' N[.- w. '"
,::l% f_'/ ,/ ; ,fi i h(ll;llh,c.:(+&hl y . AF P ,
/ v+y A 6 Q'K M W w ; n W d,('\,
M .w
;;lh}\',
R l[, $l: ,m@;ja'* W, %' w. si$$?, h$ h&,,. d,? x
. + , < - ,
. u i .9 .
;; $ $ M g p g % q g g j g:. g y' s)y -
wa; ; ;ya , ,p '6fwasz gx gg' 3 x:g gy.;y,, x 1/. A j.-{'. x . )ge s p1,k,g j': h' >
, V^'c.39' $ Y ; !al
~
Iti ~t t - Q\ ) .'l'^ ; Ws=.8#.f-l , A 2
;~ $%yif_ /_
h -~l
~
~
A,~' . ' ' , \- -
- l. ..\. ,,Yg . s.l T d 'g.f ~ l'%
; . l'QV /y /,t ,y' N i -'?%. ..i5';f.
, ;,- f,g,; s.5 y l.. s...,pp g g}
vy%3 >\ .
- x. :: - , ,; . m .
w, .
., N. s
+
.::7 - ,l 7
. 5' ~; Q _~
- k $ { ~_, ' ~. . ~~'
i
~t .' & ls, .- \ ' **
- ::.~% -~. .
s .-, g ', . :f, ,, ' ,
- ~
S 3q. N ' l)P4 9 s: ~ v%'Wysghem=c. jign . n W. ^ x'.',. '.+' 1 ,
. ii: 6 M i n E\ \g.
f./., . ;- d=t=a a=e gg ,= u ..,- x 4w y ____= a ;;; ~ 2 . ..
,e
~-
~~5 T ..
WV 9 O
N 1 l
. ". * ^ MTE 6 PNg sW ?-
'i f. $ ^ ~ s W
< h n : -ll%@g k
x MN[biA
} ,.!v 9 4:;z;;.. i -
! 'y ,
m :;. c
, M, /~ n N /s m.9m .j -
g ' I'f:. . > ' N . , _L if
%h f 7:$4 A
,.i
-lx m
- /4 j'ff
, p\ 9.
/: 3
?. .
f3 ,
> . , ~j .
p .t hr . ~
*x '
? '
g ' y . . co oMj. g ' ~ /N /s :: .. ; . /\- . t-j \ Ti:?l;
} ., ,
;. p+l5 4 xv )gl l_ Jl..: :gglN ao
/ .c , .. ,-
i x no gqo e
' & y-,,~,/,. . - .
'L
- l.;y. , v+ mT lx .\ '
f m.y~ ~gg+ j .:, - -; ;. :;::: t
. -j::*.
, y .. .a?r 7
. . s, .. -
.c /
x:= .,.~+- ~4 ,. r
/,. .\ .
,oy .: li:q... ,.
>.> y - /' n, .,
- t: ~. -wf . "* . .. .. ]
\. .,, i .g' " l n: . ; .,N;i <
o c .
-~
&~
% ,/
.;: , ; , i
- n. - n,. ~ ,, .. v . c, , ,
'l:- . s _' ' '
ll~~;h,;lif .. .1 .,?:
..f..
s
~
i.;:; :: :. : ' : n . : - b s .:. s..
. : x. . . M.e ,&., s . .
y .\ x x: =. N t .
,~,~
,9 s~ ::: .. : ; .:.
v..-
- c. Y
... s '
*:g. } . . ,0
, , .+ .,,'"_,,'[ro%;< , =p
~~ _, _
, y
/ _- -_:'3 1
', ' 16 '. 1 '
jy '*% . 4 l :!?: . ~ 5 { : $ ; $ . \ . '\'; ' .. QYs)<y A ' 4,f.'p ,. ,
- =_ -
v2. v .
- "5: c pi . . _ ,0 ..
g%, : ;- =' s=N '
,. g 5' .- , J , %,'* . ..',?- ..
/
== w,:.
m =. + gc,w w.
- . gage t
- -
m.E @F: - .nr- _ ::._.3 '-
%~;._
~ ,,g. . s.-
,> ,,%'7
% s. ,- >;; ,-
s-g :-M 2, _ . _ ' . -
% ,9 -re:
.g w) 1 .x - ,
,,;;y;., ,
.n ~
- ~ x ~nh a~yar~O ;.'. .
-yn,-
e p h-- -[- - w .;'- M Hv s xvoun 55
>k
[ h
Ww e 6 AM got41- .5._a ., NI4 6 -
, \- $'.
/
,'y .' -
; M, ,[ h Y
/. /
-5r, k
~ b~;%,
xi t b '
> 'N o.- N e
/ s ..y .. y/ ,. '-,.
; - / s- ,
% , 'N / ,x
.. N ,,,' [ ' / ,X ' j , \ 'g." -
YM M i ( ' s /x y
. ';A7,N,
., x ,
'j>'gN},.
/ /s ~
4 ( N (.Q .mx 1 4 n. S -
,N -
fs .\ t ..' '( 's y^s c
.X e ' r,
'o f'.. /I( ' sg ' 'vN ,J"'h [g . ;/ ' 'sRN$ kN/
' / ,X y'
/. , e ON[ 4 x. -
. . ., .'..' ~/.N\ ,
,y 79 A ,' ' s s ,, , ,N /
\;..+-,c m %:N f *' ii
's
_ ! s, , '
'i '
7- s W'
!a;;:[17:7 ;p f n / f. ; Q 'b l. ,2K,' MAyx 1
.e ew W.,m;m+
a V .
. .c .sc y v &a % n# ..e
&: q;, 4 . x ' 3y 4 v ..- .r
' I '
b U - w
- F%.ae@r,.h+Mghp~5$ vn!..? +e - ^ 'pl4
- J M u u t g gae?3 sg g y b w eg 3 M-
$,P stwpjMgh.
uli M $a.. Q
..g
'yv;g M e w. 3 ' wy ' w%s 'y y .
g, vp p . 9 :e q .. _ s\e gg. .47 ,x w .. y q .
. x . g i;ip w . g. e. y . ~. g :' 8 A .p ...x 4g q.1 ,... g ? ,.
Qx Lsw% '} yf w&,:m33 -
%\+h w @V. &cr.
f (.==Mftl ..:: . .. . / s'd;% h;f4 N wck- Sg. .b -s w EQ w u w #<
'" N ., ~.
'..',%'..._q'l
~ / . p' q
- b ,
ir fy. .. w%Y:t% sli c,
+uw.
. . %. s - s.
.w n. Os b'
[*[5 . ". '
..,. (% -S , s
~mu%,. Y\Q)fl.'~'.3 '%- .
%, Wd 9 t .
a s _g ,
Attachment G QI-QP-ll.4-1, Rev. 11 (July 5,1983) k .
il' i INSTRUCTION ISSUE I,.[ TEXAS UTit.mES GENERATING CO. NUMBER l REVISION CATE PAGE [ R CMES QI,Qp,lg 4,l i 11 l 1 of 12 1.- lJUL 0 5 1983 4 I PREPARED BY: / y//2 bbY- 4/2'2bf h, INSPECTION OF STEEL i SUBSTRATE SURFACE
/f DATE 4 PREPARATION AND APPROVED BY: //I/ )
PRIMER APPLICATION '
' OA
]
i
! APPROVED BY: kh j ,
[j DATE
1.0 REFERENCES
f
- 1-A CCP-30, " Coating Steel Substrates Inside Reactor Buildings
and Radiation Ar s" ~
77l r, ,. __ , . 1-B CCP-30A, "Coatin Steel Substrates'Insice Reactor Buildings and Radiation Areas" >
' ' 'f I
> 1-C QI-QP-11.4 22, "QC Verification of Protective Coatings Unique Identification Number Transfer" 1-0 CP-QP-18.0, " Inspection Reports" b 1E CP QP-15.0, " Tagging System"
- 2.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE TORICAL FILE '
This Instruction shall describe methoas uttitzed by Quality Control in inspection of steel substrate surface preparation . i and prime coat applications and in accordance with References . [- 1 A and 1-0. \ l 3.0 INSTRUCTION 3.1 PRE-BLAST CLEANING OPERATIONS 3.1.1 Anbient Conditions The inspector shall determine air temperature, surface tempera ture, relative humidity and dew. point of substrate structures. A calibrated non-mercury filled dr bulb
. thennameter or a calibrated temperature recorder (yBristol 4069 TH or equivalent) shall be used for air temperature detennination. A calibrated non. mercury wet bulb ,
thermometer or a calibrated humidity recorder (Oristol 4069 t-TH or equivalent) shall be used to detennine relative l humidity. The dew point shall be determined by the b ~ difference in the dry and wet bulb temperatures using the TuocooA
~
w h
~ '
l
.h %):8 -
INSTRUCTION ISSUE N h ',I s TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. CMES DAM 3
- QI-QP-11.4-1 2 of 12 g 11 JUL 0 51983 p
A . 7 y' k, :r U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychralnetric d- Tables, W.B. No. 235.. When dry bulb readings are greater
. . than 100*F the dew point and relative humidity should be ?.] determined using the 100*F rea' ding (note in remarks). .The
, c : surface temperature shall be detemined by placing a calibrated j .' surfacg temperature thermometer (Onega - Amprove Fastemp, Range g: . 10-250 F) in contact with the substrate surface to be blast i:: ~ c' leaned. The thermometer probe shall remain in contact with
;[ the surface until the temperature reading stabilizes.
- s Final surface 7 reparation ~shall not begin un1.ess temperature
.(
of the surface is a minimum of 5'F above the dew point. C 3.1.2 Abrasive Acceptability
- b. '
The Inspector shall obtain a sample of the abrasive to be used from each work area. The abrasive shall be verified 2, to be dry by feel. All grease, oil and deleterious , S.. material is unacceptable. .'- ? ,J V Particle size must be sufficient to achieve 1 mil surface
,J profile minimum. - , , 3.1.3 dlast Equipment Acceptability
[ The inspector shall perform the following inspections / tests y .. to determine acceptability of blast cleaning equipment prior
'i to use:
3-y a. Verify that water separators are installed in air 1 4- supply system and that the separators have been drained h.. , of accumulated water and drains left partially open. ', I b. Air supply contamination shall be checked at the nozzle " ) jI; . : prior to use by exposing a sheet of white paper or
- l ..
cloth to the blast of air (no sand) for approximately #6 . 30 seconds. The paper or cloth shall be examineo,,1!op ',," ~, evidence of contamination (oil, water, foreign matthr... f' e tc. ) . No evidence of contamination is accep$able.. 1 - 3.1.4 Solvent Cleaning (If Chemical Contamination Present)
}. .
' %j-. - If oil, grease, or other chemical contamination ts present, verify that solvent cleaning (in accordance with S{PC-SP-1) is performed and that all chemical contamination '11 removed prior to blast cleaning steel surfaces. ' v -:
,M \
penn Pen. t "
- & -h \
INSTRUCTION ISSUE NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE. TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. L QI-QP-11.4-1 11 JUL 0 51983 3 of 12
.1 5
f j 3.2 POST BLAST CLEANING OPERATIONS 3.2.1 Blast Cleanuo The inspector shall visually check the blasted substrate surface. Je The surface shall be brushed or vacuumed to the extent 1 required for final surface inspection. The adjacent areas
]{ -
shall be cleaned to the extent necessary to avoid contamination during subsequent coating applications. - 4
,i 3.2.2 Blasted or Power Tooled Surface Acceptabilit_v ,
f . The inspector shall perfonn the following inspections to i* detennine acceptability of the blast cleaned or power tooled surface: ,
- a. Absence of Foreign Matter -- A .vi_sual inspection shall be performed to detennine' that all oil and
.j4 b' grease, dirt, millscale, rust, corrosion products, 3 oxides, paint or other foreign matter have been
.i completely removed from the surface except for i, light shadows, very slight streaks or slight.
1 - discolorations caused by rust stains, mill scale,
', oxides, or slight, tight residues of paint or '
.i coating that may remain. At least 95 percent of i each square inch of surface area shall be free of all residues, and the remainder shall be limited
} to light discolo ations as mentioned above.
i NOTE: If coating removal is required from an
?
', area or iten which has been coated in Y
accordance with this instruction, shadows
- or tight residues of primer which may
! ~ i remain in the profile of the previously i prepared substrate is acceptable. li b. Removal of Sharp Projections -- A reinspection for sharp projections that were not blended (rounded)
- during blast cleaning or power tooling shall be l perfonned. -
' ~ l Weld splatter on structural steel shall be removed i by either grinding or sand blasting. However, if the weld splatter should remain after the above ib operation, the weld splatter will be acceptable.
% =.
l
. INSTRUCTION ISSUE REVISION PAGE DATE
! j( TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
, CNM j QI-QP-11.4-1 11 JUL 0 51983 4 of 12 I
J Sharp projections are not acceptable. 1 Protrusions and peaks shall be ground to a rounded
.j contour.
NOTE: Any mechanical surface preparation other than sandblasting or hand or power tooling < of sharp edges or weld spatter will require a visual welding inspector's acceptance of
.{ the' work perfomed.
- c. Anchor Pattern Depth -- The anchor pattern depth of the j blasted or power tooled surface shall be inspected at -
I random locations using a Keane-Tator Surface Profile t 3 Comparator (model 373) or equivalent. A power tooled d ' surface shall be inspected with use of either a roughness gage ar.d/or equivalent. I
]D y
The anchor pattern depth for a blasted or power tooled surface shall be a minimum of 1.0 mils. _ I No maximum 3rofile will be specified, providing that correct mi1Lage and surface uniformity requirements l I can be obtained after primer application.
] 3.2.3 Unique Number Identification ' After blasting power tool and prior to prime coat application, QC shall verify that constructibn has identified each peice with a unique number in accordance with References 1-A and 1-B.
The QC Inspector shall maintain a Protective Coatings Unique Identification Number Log, Attachment i for all protective
, coatings application on all steel designated for use in the Reactor Building. Subsequent subdivision of coated steel in
' the field or shop shall be witnessed by QC in accordance
; with Reference 1-C.
NOTE: A. Unique number may be assigned to a lot of material
; to be prime coated at the same time. For example, i six pieces steel to be coated at same time may all
.j have same unique number.
B. Liner plate is excluded from QP numbers. !4 Equipment which is identified with a permanent plant
- j identification number need not be identified with a I .
,; _, =co m i
~
g '. q g g .
.9 I
h e-U SER REVISION PAGE
- TEXAS UTIUTIES GENERATING CO.
[4 s ' (~ CPSES QI-QP-11.4-1 11 5 of 12 JUL 0 519831
?a Protective Ccatings unique Identification Number. The term
>} ,> " Equipment" is not to include pipe hangers, cable tray
,1 hangers, conduit supports, or structural steel. They will
;t all have Protective Coating unique Identification Numbers b
assigned.
~
3.3 PRIMER PRE-APPLICATION INSPECTIO'NS
/ 3.3.1 Ambient Conditions
- c.
.Imediately prior to primer application, the QC Inspecto
, shall determine air temperature, surface temperature, relative humdity. 'The primer application shall not begin unless 4 the surface temperature is a minimum of 5' above the dew point. .
1 When dry bulb readings are greater than 100'F, the dew point
. and relative humidity should be detennined using the 100'F
{ reading (note in remarks). (' Nonnal conditions of ambient and surface temperatures shall. be as follows: . Ambient Temp. (*F) Surface Temp. (*F)
~
. Dimetcote 6 40-120 40-130 CarboZinc'II 40-95 40-110 In no case shall Carboline and Ameron limits be exceeded (0-130'F ambient and 0-200*F surface temperatures). Coating materials (if thinned) shall be thinned in accordance with j Reference 1-A or 1-B.
Humidity values may vary from 10% to 95%; however, primer
'j shall not be applied to a wet or damp surface. ;
3 3.3.2 Substrate Surface Acceptability The Inspector shall visually reinspect the sandblasted or powertooled surface of the substrate just prior to primer application for evidence of contamination (oil, grease, markings, rust, etc.) All contamination must be removed prior to priming. , If rust forms after Blasting or Power Tooling, the surface 1 shall be " Shower Blasted" or "Re-furbished" before priming. ; l II (w,. .r , Under no case will a prepared surface be exposed for more than 24 hours before priming.
.%g, TUGCC CA
1;
.n
@; 6 1 A
3 INSTRUCTION ISSUE REVISION PAGE TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
^
g CF3ES p QI-QP-11.4-1 11 Jul. 0 51983, ' 6 of 12
.c t
3.3.3 Air SuDDly ACCGDtabilitY I
'S The Inspector shall inspect the air supply system for pressure pots and spray guns for suitable filters / traps /
separators. A trap, filter, or separator shall be installed in air system to pressure pot and spray gun.. The effective - j ness of these items shall be, verified by exposing a sheet of 1 white paper or cloth to the blast of air for approximately " 30 seconds. The paper or cloth shall be examined for evidence of contamination (oil, water, foreign matter, etc.). iji.i No evidence of contamination is acceptable.
,2 3.3.4 Oualification of Applicator (s)
,i ~j The Inspector shall verify (by Qualification Record or list 3 of qualified a'pplicators from QA file) that the coating
-1 applicators on each shift are qualified for safety-related 3( coating work.
b 3.3.5 Mixing Operations
.i -
3.3.5.1 Coating Materials Identification
.._ _ ___ The inspector shall inspect the coating material containers
,! prior to mixing contents for product identification and j
verify that all materials are correct for coating application. g Approved materials are: s CZ-11 DIMETCOTE ,i 1 Carbo Zinc 11 base (gray or green) Dimetcote 6 base i; Carbo Zinc filler Dimetcote filler Carboline #21 or 33 Thinner Amercoat #65 or 101 lj Thinner i
.t He shall also verify that each component container is l
- identified by batch number and that the shelf life has not 1 expired. Carbo Zinc 11 base has a shelf life of 12 months.
Carbo Zinc filler and Dimetcote 6 base and filler have a shelf life of 24 months. , 3.3.5.2 Mixing Operations i b An inspector shall witness each mixing / thinning operation. 1 The inspector shall verify that mixing operations are j perfomed in accordance with Reference 1-A and 1-B. mi mocooA L,
41 9 INSTRUCTION REVISION ISSUE PAGE e' NUMBER DATE TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. [ V QI.QP-11.4-1 11 7 f 12 - JUL 0 51983 3.3.5.3 Thinning Operation An inspector shall verify that - primer thinning cceplies [ with thinning requirements established in References 1-A and 1 B. L 3.3.5.4 When coating materials are mixed / thinned in locations other than the field, the inspector verifying the mixing operation I shall fill out the Paint Mixing Slip, Attachment 3. The
-! inspector perfonning the pre-application inspection shall
.i record the infonnation from t'e Paint Mixing Slip on the
, -j Inspection Report, Attachment 2. The Paint Mixing Slip j need not be retained. , j____ 3.4 PRIMER APPLICATION INSPECTION 3.4.1 Surveillance of Primer Application g During application operations, the QC Inspector shall verify j , that the pressure pot is continuously agitated. The QC i Inspector shall also verify that' the hose length does not exceed 75 feet, and that the coating has not exceeded pot . life per Reference 1-A or 1-B. i 3.5 INSPECTION REPORTS . I .I j ! All inspections required by Sections 3.1 through 3.4 shall
?. be documented on an IR, Attachment 2, in accordance with
. 1 Reference 1-D.
-] s NOTE: A reject tag will be applied to any unsat area.
. with the inspection report, inspector's name,
- j and phone extension listed per Reference 1-E.
, i 3.6 MAPPING & LARGE AREAS { For large areas which have received coatings prior to 10/23/81 (Issuance date of Rev 5 of this procedure), a unique number shall be assigned to the original inspection checklist. This number will be transferred to.the area on a j ! map drawing to provide traceability to the original i { , checklist. For any coatings applied after 10/23/81, the IR
- 1 ,
number shall be transferred to the area on the map drawing. 1 The map drawing shall be maintained by the QC Supervisor, or 4 his designee, until the entire surface 'has been coated, at
& which time, the completed map shall be transmitted to the Permanent Plant Records Vault.
-j .
l Penn m : _ - . . , _ _ . - - - - . _ - - - . . . . _ , - . . . . . . _ _ _ _ . _ , , _ _ . _ _ . - _ _ _ . _ . _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ ~
63 Go i INSTRUCTION e ISSUE
); TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
DAM CPSES A-
-)I-QP-11.4-1 11 JUl. O e 1983 8 of 12
- s. :
p
.s. .i NOTE:1 Separate maps shall be maintained for the prime, seal, j' and finish coats.
NOTE:2 If the coated area applicable to a given IR '- F is irregular in shape, a sketch should be , attached to the IR to indicate the extent of the area inspected.
-ls NOTE:3 Coating repairs requiring recoating shall be ' ' mapped but repairs requiring only touch-up 1
need not be mapped-- --
- NOTE:4 The following parameters, as necessary, should
- 1. be considered for description of areas on s
- the on the sketch.
! a. Bottom and top elevations (vertical and 1 diagonal surfaces) or elevation of surface -
; (horizontal surfaces).
i b. Dimensions in relation to Azimuths column i lines, reactor centerline of known location. y -
- c. Quadrant, compartment, cavity or -room in i
which inspection area is located.
- d. Unit number.
j e. Relation to surface to cardinal directions
; i .: (lie North, South) etc.).
1, M ***-*e
- ee+ . . . . . , . _ .
5 ~ i -) 4
].
.c J.
! ~. :.
< ~~;
b no-i m , moco oA
. _ _ . - . . - . . .. . -- -. - - _ - _ ._ _ ._, .. -. ~ ._ . . _ _ . . . .
e.1 M. ' f
'El
@ 1 STRUCTION N; ~g ISSUE
-A REVISION PAGE' NUMBER DATE TEXAS UTILITIES GENEMATING CO.
$j CPSES f,y . (,. 9 of 12
. qt_qp.11.41 11 JUL 0 51983 x' .
4 ~ gj ATTACHtelT 1 a h
>>o t., . .
p , . xJ
?A g -
f.: . W *
.pJ. PIIDTECTIVE COATIEES
~
$q. . , UNIQUE IDDIT!*ICATION ItireER LOG a< \.,.
g k., ~ LOG NUPBER - ITEM DESCRIPTION DATE COP 9ENTS
*** i , A ' ?, *
' Y-l s' i i ,'.
.%~ l I.$I it,<
94 n ik . .
'"y.
l 1 (= 2ri wW* 4
=
5' fy
. T
'l m
- - ?" 4
- c. .
- j n.
i:
-I o?
-} .
?
r g .
;r
-1 g L's . E y m.
%g, TUGCO OA
, , , - ...v .. . _ _., ,. , ._. - . , , ,
7 _
. . _ . . . ,, , .m_. . . , ,...m,.. , _ , - , , _ , . . - , ,
,/j. ,
- n. s d '
t@ @
..s INSTRUCTION ISSUE W REVISION PAGE
; TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
NUMBER DATE R - CMM d' ( QI-QP-11.4-1 11 JUL 0 5 1982 10 of 12 3
- l'
[ ATTACIPENT 2 w. U
%J
'8 c. ConsANCHE PEAK STEAM El.ECTRIC STATION h 'E' INSPECTION HEPORT [1 2 a
L
,. o ca PRCTECTIVE COAT!rM n
- o.
a... mau.- - a. i u se.sa. .a sw. u. coc. a asv. 6 c.unas no. = - em 6 au zun. osm. no.
.f" AS.31 ,\ sv. ..
QI-QP-11.4 1, Fev. , ,!, y Cia,=gn=a a P L J g f'on CPQgg C Fg,,,,,,, O Pg;gr,,,, y ,j h issap, agauL.f a .
$ b IIREPECftele consfLETED , ALI. Ap8uCaaLE ITthea SAftracTone O raaractiosi
_ ].; yTro, uaannefar en= untic an.ow -
't ITER $No.l~ . *
- oc J .VIhe.* *
- 1**,'g-l. MTION AMIMS gg,ggyng
. OATE 3 ,
.$ 1. l Ancient conditions checked per Para. 3.1.1 and !
4 ,$ l recorded below: DATE: l
- .) l TIME
- WET 80LB TEMP.- ORY BULB TEMP: I- l
.I lNELATIVEMtplIDITY: DEW POINT: SURF. TEMP. l f ;
3 2. I Abras*ve accontahle ser Para. 1.1.7. !
~.N /
- 3. Separators installed. draineet. and drains left I
( partially open. I q 4. I Air supply free of contamination.
- l 5 5. I Verify tha't selvent eMnice oe-*s- wd neier tn !! l i
~.. I blastino in scenevenace w8th Para. 3.1.4 l l l' h 6. I 81astis.ur";e and profile: l l l
. !l a. Blasted surface 8 surroundine areas cleaned oer l l ! N Para. 3.2.1 ! I b. Surface free of foreign matter including grease and 2 f oil. l A
- c. Sharp (non-rounded) projections removed. '
l i 1 a
- d. Anchor pattern depth 1.0 mil. minimum. ll l 4
- 7. Unique Munter stanced on piece (Record Unique Number in I I
, Block 3 above.) l l i Aseient conditions checked per Para. 3.1.1 prior to
- 8. lI H l l orimer application and record below: DATE: Il l y TIME: WET BULB TEMP: ORY BULB TEMP.* ii l i RELATIVE nUMIDITY: DEW POINT: SURF. TEMP: , l l
'j
- 9. l Substrate surface free of contaminante and tae= thma l I
( , l 24 hour elapsed since blasting. . ! l l 10. I Trap, filter or secarater installed Der Para. 3.3.3. l
- 11. ' Air supply free of contamination. l (Continued on Sheet 2...) l
^
l l l i
%gg
l
%y '
W
~ ..
W {'j .
' ."lg INSTRUCTION o
NUMBER REVISION ISSU) PAGE TEXAS UTIUTIES GENERATING CO. DATc
%. r CPSES
, M:,. q- QI-QP-ll.4-1 -11 ) JUL 0 5 1983 11 of 12 G.4 ...
. T::
.p; ATTACP. MENT 2 (Continued)
.n_ .
Q . - - - - .- : ~;-~
; Ql-QP-11.4-1, Rev.
W. . .
- Sheet 2 of 2
,d I .
,; CoasAMcHE PEM STEAnd ELECTAtc STATtcs '
,% I :
INSPECTION REPORT
'jy ,,
(supPLeeENTAL) - - M.3 ,
?E- stem
~
oars 4 C-Q* , ^ suo, INSPECTION ATTA!8uTES g 3 smeansu e a I e
- *, h 12. t Qualification of anotienene. It to annitrona i i i E I l l l C
- 13. I Verify Mirino onoratione ner Par = 11r i I i i f.! I
'y 14 t Coating Material Product Identification:
I I I I e t T;'] la Base Lot No.: PART A.- 1 I i
& %. Filler lot No. ' I i L
,. Q, Ic. Thinner Let No.
- i l i "3 Id. Time Mixeft i1 1 l
, $f I' l l4 l ' \1. % e i i i
; 15. Pressure oot agitated. i 1 6 i N. 16.
Pne life nnt ever&M O+ i l i l
- 17. Home lett than 75 feet. e a i f *.j. ' ' # g ;
Q
' i 1 a
., ll l l _
g
~ i ea 'l
..] i s.j 6
.',y I '
1
.*I
[Q 1 i l i ,
- 4. 1 i 4 a6
- '.}
84 f 33 i i i i 1
$, i l lii (
.j AD8AAK3 (ones, specs.gTcJ .-
t s. . s, 5 4 - k 4 ..k i i l w
."8 (,' : ""# * "C" ** M l L A. CLOSED - s eissamns 1i -? oc sospecton ,,
.s .
y l ? .- - ,t . A smnasem e
-_ . _ . . _ . . _ . . _ , . _ . . . . , . , . . _ . _ , , _ _ _ . _ _ _ ..a . _-
l
. r . . e~
Y .- e
;~
5'j) INSTRUCTION ISSUE PAGE REVISION DATE 1 - NUMBER
- 4. - TEXAS UTIUTIES GENERATING CO.
- 1. ( CPSES QI-QP-11.4.1 11 12 of 12 tjj '
.a JUL 0 51983
*3 v, .
DI , ATTACHMENT 3
.i .
[] 21 *
- 9 P
If b
?4 '
Je s 3 .] .__ j, . Y1 M
. )+
;~ PAINT MIXING SLIP
'{
y DATE: r E' BLDG. ELEV.
?;j COATING: COLOR. ?$ . TIME HIXED: TEMP. .-> BATCH # BASE (A)
CAT./FLR (B) J THINNER (C) 3 GAL.
~
M&TE i's j
~
INSP DATE: 4 c'< l ~ l '; i: l 1 ' t .. l
, kV ..
l TUGC0 OA Perm Ne,1 f . r i . _ , . . - . .: . ....;. . . .
Attachment H hI-QP-ll.4-5, Rev. 16 (July 5, 1983)
+
o . 'a -
. . . ' 1.'
--- +- s ., ,,
A 1 INSTRUCTION ISSUE h)p.- TEXAS UT!UTIES GENERATING CO. - NUMBER REVISION CATE PAGE
' SES v QI-QP 11.4-5 16 1 f 24
.JUL 0 5 1983 b l INSPECTION OF STEEL PREPARED BY:
Hu d. h A 4/EFI9 7 - SUBSTRATE PRIMER / E s
- 1 REPAIR AND SEAL AND APPROVED BY: /[d , L. M 74/P 7 i FINISH COAT APPLICATION DAT
- j. AND REPAIR ,
y '* i APPROVED BY:
) . y VATE 1
1.0 REFERENCES
l ED P of T.*NSteebnSubstralis;;p
*"M 1 -"w ] m 1 1-A QI-QP 11.4-1, "Inspectfo[]'dn LSyrface y ;] ,
Preparation- and Primer Application and Repair" I j 1-8 CCP-30, " Coating Steel. Substrates Inside Reactor Buildings L e and Radiation Areas"
- I .
'l 1-C CCP-30A, " Coating Steel Substrates Inside Reactor Buildings
!v and Radiation Areas" 1 10 CP-QP-18.0, " Inspection Reports" 1-E QI.QP.11.4 22, "QC Verification of Protective Coatings i Unique Identification. Number Verification" p 1-F CP.QP.15.0, " Tagging System" - jm 4 2.1 PURPOSE,AND SCOPE [- The purpose of this instruction is to outline methods i ( utilized by Quality Control personnel in inspection of n .. . . _ . . _
~
primer repair and seal and finish coat application and
.__. repair.
I 3.0 INSTRUCTION g.
- j. i 3.1 Ii;SPECTION (F PRIMER i 3.1.1 Primer Inspections Prior to Application of Seal or Finish Coat l
l a) QC shall verify . that construction has identified each i piece with a unique number in accordance with References 1 A, 1 8 and 1.C. The QC Inspector shall maintain a l . i } I i d
"co c^
~~. . x 5 _ . . . - . . - - - - - . - . . . . .
.- , , - - - -_. . ~ , _ . .
mm..: .m. ,. - - - -m m ..mm. . .-m m u m .,,..x,,m ,,.s.m. % o: y = _ f.1
~
7 .
- ?J ij c. INSTRUCTION ISSUE PAGE REVISION i ,jA. - TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. I p- CPSES QI-QP-ll.4-5 16 2 of 24 a M 0 51983 '
4~ 4/ b
; NOTE:
1 A. Unique number may be assigned to a lot of 3 material to be prime coated at the same time.
$: For example, six pieces steel to be coated *-
t : at same time may all have same unique number. i . . [
~- B. Liner plate is excluded from QP numbers.
Equipment which is identified with -permanent plant k i( identification number need not be identified with a Protective Coatings unique identification number. The ide term " Equipment" is not to include pipe hangers, cable
,3 tray hangers, conduit supports, or structural steel.
.' $ They will all have Protective Coating unique identification numbers assigned. j 1 e .
; c b) For all prime coated items. which do not exhibit a .
Protective Coatings Unique Identification Number (QP
>g
Number) the Inspector shall perform an Adhesion (Patch)
's: Test. If' adequate documentation. exists the above is not j ;
applicable. A calibrated Elcometer 106 Adhesion Tester shall be used to verify that the minimum acceptable
- , tensile of adhesion to the steel substrate has been S attained. Each test shall consist of three individual
[ dollies tested to failure. (See Notes 1 and 2 below.)
,s..
1 Criteria: The minimum acceptable strength per dolly 1 shall be 200 psis If any one of the three i?, dollies should test below the minimum t1 t,. acceptable strength, the prime coat shall be t- removed to the steel substrate over the entire item.
~
y Prime coated items which are acceptInble shall be stamped with a "QP" number by Construction. The QC 1 Inspector shall maintain a protective coatings unique identification. number log for all protective coatings j applications per this section. t Primer repairs, if required, shall be performed in accordance with Section 3.2. l.
.J NOTE 1: Any item, which due to their size or j .{.: A configuration will not accomodate testing W with an Elcometer 106 Adhesion Tester, shall l - {. not be subject to adhesion testing.
l .!c.s ~ :. 1
<Y .: ..
* M Nm1
s .. .
,3 w m INSTRUCTION REVISION . ISSUE PAGE I . TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
M b CPSES I QI-QP-11.4-5
.j 16 JtJL 0 M ign' 3:6f' 24 's 3
li d Y NOTE 2: For items with total exposed surface area of M 10 square feet or less - each adhesion test shall consist of only one dolly tested to h
;j failure.
N N c) Verify the primer has cured required amount of time per [j - Reference 1-8 or 1-C, as applicable. c - M d) Perform a visual inspection of the primed surface in accordance.with the following: d[ - 9 . 1. Runs / sags - A DFT measurement shall be made with the Elcometer DFT gage. Runs / sags 5.5 mil ~s or - less thick (DFT) which show no evidence of 2 mudcracking (See NGTE) are acceptable. Refer to { .~' References 1-B and 1-C for repair of runs / sags exceeding 5.5 mils. d NOTE: Muderacking is defined as irregular y cracking as in a dried mud puddle.
.] 2. Dry Spray - Must be re' moved by screening or g abrading before overcoating.
4
,s .
[ 3. Over Spray - Must, be removed before.overcoating.
! 4. Contamination b
011 and arease'- unacqeptable Embedded foreion materials - unacceptable 4
.h Stains - rust- (red) and zinc. oxide (white) stains are acceptable provided loose particles are ];i removed prior to application' of finish coat.
j 5. Skips / damaged areas / gross discontinuities such as
.j holidays or voids - unacceptable.
'4
) .e) The inspector shall perfonn a DFT inspection of the cured primer film. A calibrated 0-25 Elcometer q Inspector OFT gage Model III/IE, or equivplent, shall be used. A minimum of five separate spot measurements
- (See Note 1) spaced evenly over the structure (See Note 2) shall be taken. Since the magnetic gage is
.; sensitive to geometric discontinuities in the steel, 1 measurements less than 1 inch from the edge or a hole ! }q h shall be avoided where possible. (See Note 3) i d
- .i l 3 N TUGCC CA -
1
- u. .-
~ ~
l a . . Ei
.a - - -
3'* INSTRUCTION NUMBER REVISION ISSUE DATE PAGE
.@ ._ TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
3.g (. " "8 QI-QP-11.4-5 16 . R 0 5 1983 4 of 24 y . Ef[ . y .. h . Dry Film Thickness shall be as follows: h . J' d _ Min. (mils) Max.(mils)
@ g CZ-II spot test 1.5 5.5 06 spot test -1. 5 5.5 ..
'b. ." D6 average DFT 2.0 5.0 #-
'.. CZ-II average DFT 2.0 4.5
.. . NOTE 1: A spot measurement is a series of three 1
1' - measurements in the same general area. The
'$ 2 probe should be moved a short distance for Ej
~"
each gage reading. Discard any unusually high 3 $ - or low gage reading 'that cannot be repeated
?j consistently. Take an average of these three y
y gage readings as one spot :aeasurement.
!? NOTE 2: For small areas of coating, 5 separate spot i measurements shall be taken. For larger -, _
areas, 5 spot measurements shall be taken for every 100 square feet of coating. kh rs NOTE 3: -Items with appreciable surface curvat;ure and i fj . other geometrical discontinuities, such as t . handrails, gratings, stairs, sway struts, etc., shall be exempt from dry film thickness E j fj , measurement per Reference 1-B and 1-C.
, a:i - l
's 3.2 PRIMER REPAIRS 4
.5,.
2a . 3.2.1 Saas and Runs Over 5.5 Mils DFT -
- 3 .. .
s
*4
. 4 Sags and runs over 5.5 mils DFT may be abraded by sanding Q or aluminum screening. If surface is acceptable per Section q ... _ _.. _._. __. . . ..___.3.1, document such on Attachnent 3. If surface is unaccept-k able refer to Section 3.2.2 or 3.2.3 as applicable.
!3 ' 3.2.2 Primer Touch-up Repair (Primer Damaged to Steel Surface) >:,'l)
-(-- The coating inspector shall conduct the following inspections to document jirimer' t6dch-up~ripair ' operations Ij
% when the damage is to the steel surface and spot 10 -
sandblesting or power tool abrading is required for surface lf preparation.
- i
{4 .i '
- 4 t
i.ki'
- 9. :. .c w-pere ne.
r '; - i
- s. ,
ed F (*V ,
. '; r g %'
. aa..e. sr .y m., a .M.
,- . .='.- ,.s -'
.. d-=t.-~< '
e w N .' -- . , 6 g p. . 3 . -.---.-ir M 6- '. --m7
.._ . - . . . . - , -. -.---c,-- . . . . _ . , , - - - - . . . . - - - , . . , , . , . , . . . . . . . , . , _ . - . , . . ., - , . , _ , _ ,
3 __
, .. -_a ...u .w .n,.. . ._a n., . m.g.m.. 3.nm., w.,, ,
y .. .. . O .:- s- (y 4
- (v
- ,- INSTRUCTION REVISION ISSUE PAGE
~* k TEXAS UTILmES GENERATING CO. CPSES QI,QP,11.4,5 16 5 of 24 d l J. JUL 0 5 198 lt !O !( t .
+ ' '3 a) Ambient- Conditions D $ Ine inspectb$[shall determine air temperature, surface
-R temperature :frelative hunidity and dew point of substrate h structures.~5 ; A calibrated non, mercury filled dry bulb
?! themometer or calibrated temperature recorder (Bristol C - 4069TH or equivalent) shall be used for air temperature ii detemination. A calibrated non, mercury wet bulb
- thermometer or a calibrated humidity recorder (Bristol t 4069TH-or- equivalent) shall be used to determine g relative humidity. The dew point shall be determined i ;a by the difference .in dry and wet bulb temperatures
'.' using the U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau
- Psychometric Tables, WB No. 235. When dry bulb readings
- j are greater than 100*F, the dew point should be h detemined ' using ^ the 100*F dry bulb reading, and
- E relative humidity shall be determined by subtracting
- . wet bulb . from the surface temperature or ambient temperature. whichever is greater. If the dry bulb a
{' themometer , exceeds 100*F, the instrument shall be returned to..the calibration lab for recalibration. E The surface ~ temperature shall be detemined by placing '0 a calibrated surface temperature thermometer (Omega,
.: Amprobe fast temp. range of 10*,250*F) in contact with
'j a the substrate surface until the temperature _ reading stabilizes. j Final surface preparation shall not begin unless the j temperature of. the surface is a minimum of 5* above the dew point.
) Normal conditions of ambient and curface temperature t for application of primer shall be as follows:
i , Anbient Temp. (*F) Surface Temp. (*F) !' Dimetcote 6 40,120 401130 Carbozinc 11 40,95 40,110 In no case shall Carbo 11ne and Ameron Ifmits be exceeded (0*,130*F ambient and 0*,200*F surface temperatures). Coating material -(if thinned) shall be thinned in accordance with Reference 1,B or 1,C. l r Humidity values may vary from 10% to 951; however, b primer shall not be applied to a wet or damp surface.
; The surface temperature shall be a minimus of 5* above the dew point..
Penn ns. :
" OA i '~
( - . . - - - . . . . _ . - . _ . . - . . . . . . _ _ ~ - - - . - - - . - . - . - . . . . . _ . - - - . _ . . _ . - . , - - .
4 4-
- '{ . INSTRUCTION ISSUE N DAM
.C TEXAS UTluTIES GENERATING CO.
m es H QI-QP-11.4-5 6 of 24 16 JUL 0 51983 J... O i b) Verify abrasive acceptablility (if used) by obtaining a
- s .- sample of the abrasive to be used. The abrasive shall be verified to be dry by feel with 3
deleterious materials. ' Particle size,no must be grease, oil or sufficient to achieve a minimum of 1 mil surface profile. g c) of blast cleaning equipment Verify. (if used) prior acceptability t . to use by:
- 1. Verifying that water separators are installed _in. __
.i the a!r supply system and that separators have 1 been drained of accumulated water and drains left partially open.
- 2. Air supply contamination shall be checked at the t
nozzle prior to use by exposing a sheet of white l ' paper or cloth to the blast of air (no sand) for approximately 30 seconds. The paper or cloth shall ., be examined for evidence of contamination (oil,
- 3 j( water, foreign matter, etc.). No evidence ' of contamination is acceptable,,
d) Verify that the blasted or power tooled surface has been brushed or vacuumed to the extent required for 4 final surface inspection. The adjacent areas shall be 1 cleaned to the extent necessary to avoid contamination during subsequent coating applications. l1-.
- j-e) Verify acceptability of the blast cleaned or power tooled surfaces by perfonning the following inspections
l T- 1. Absence of Foreign Matter -- A visual inspection ! ' shall be performed to determine that all oil and i - grease, dirt, millscale, rust, corrosion product:, l f, oxides, paint or.. other foreign matter have been 3 completely removed from the surface except for i light shadows, very slight streaks or slight discolorations caused by rust stains, mill scale, ! 4 - oxides, or slight, tight residues of paint or l ;' coating that may remain. At least 95 percent of
;. each square inch of surface area shall be free of ll all residues, and the remainder shall be limited
- a. to light discolorations as mentioned above.
j ' NOTE: -If coating removal is required from an e area or item which has been coated in f,; accordance with this instruction, shadows
'""- or tight residues of primer which may
.,'.".' remain in the profile of the previously
- v. prepared substrate is acceptable.
i tueco oA ( .: - renn rena 2..__ _ . _ _ _ _ _ . _ , , - _ . _ , _ _ - . _ . _ , _ _ _ . ~ ~ _ - . . - - - - - - - - - _ . -
- q. .
-.--....--..-....a........_..
,h' ,
\
(@ 4 INSTRUCTION ISSUE REVISION DATE PAGE - ' NUMBER
;( TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
, . CPSES J -
al-QP-11.4-5 16 7 of 24
. JUL 0 5 1983 a . ~
v P' 2. Removal of Sharp Projections -- A reinspection for
. sharp projections that were not blended (rounded)
- during blast cleaning or power tooling shall be 9 performed.
2 Weld splatter on structural steel shall be removed
- by either grinding or sand blasting. However, if the weld splatter should remain after the above
. operation, the weld splatter will be acceptable.
j Sharp projections are.not acceptable. Protrusions and peaks shall be ground to a rounded contour. 80TE: Any mechanical surface preparation other than sandblasting or hand or power
.- tooling of sharp edges or weld spatter =
4 will require a visual welding inspector's acceptance of the work perfomed.
~
- 3. Anchor Pattern Depth -- The anchor pattern depth of the blasted surface shall be inspected at random v locations using a Keane-Tator Surface . Profile Canparator (model 373) or equivalent. A power tooled surface shall be inspected with use of
~ either a roughness gage and/or equivalent.
The anchor pattern depth for a blasted 'or power tooled surface shall be a minimum of 1.0 mils. [ . ,. - j.*' _. ..No. maximum.. profile will be.. specifi,ed., providi.ng . , j that correct millage and surface unifomity t ~. requirements can be - obtained after primer . f application.
;. f) Verify applicator qualifications per Section 3.3.1.
Verify air supply acceptability per Section 3.3.4. {I g)
}, h) 1. Coating Materials Identification
+
i
- l' .
The inspector shall inspect the coating material l .f 3 containers prior to mixing contents for product identification and verify that all materials are l ifrs.- i correct for coating application.
- l. . ? -
, Q'
- s l V-
"c"
- . f.b.
- l
- ~ . . .. - - -. - . - ._ .
_. c m . . _ . . . . _ . . . _ _ . _ _ , , , ___ _ _ . _ _ y ._ _ . , _ _ . Qs
'd ;.' \
ISSUE
- fp INSTRUCTION REVISION DAM PAGE j .$ k TEXAS UTluTIES GENERATING CO.
S
'.3
- QI-QP-11.4-5 8 of 24 16 JUL 0 5198I h.:
?
b g., . . - - ,S f .. i t,k,,'.,.- Approved materials are: T' -
.-. CZ-11 Dimetcote I(r t
D. Carbo Zinc base (gray or green) Dimetcote 6 base 'd r Carbo Zinc filler Dimetcote filler ~ .
- p?. Carboline #21.or 33 Thinner Amercoat #65'or 101
- - Thinner I
.[' ' He shall also verify that each component container j.., is identified by batch number and that the shelf
. life has not expired. Carbo Zinc 11 base has a j shelf life of 12 months. Carbo Zinc filler and
- Dimetcote 6 base and filler have a shelf life of 24 months.
- 2. Mixing Operations
{j ,
- An inspector shall, witness each mixing / thinning . -
. (, operation. The inspector shall verify that mixing i.T operations are perfonned in accordance with -
Reference 1-A and 1-8. -
- }.: . . _.
>[ 3. Thinning Operation a .
lD An inspector shall verify that primer thinning 4
?. complies with thinning requirements established s.; - e. in References 1-A and 1-B.
' p.; 4. When coating materials are mixed / thinned in - locations other than the field, the inspector
- il't -. . verifying the mixing operation shall fill out the
]. Paint Mixing Slip, Attachment 5. The inspector perfonning the pre-application inspection shall y- record the infonnation from the Paint Mixing Slip on the Inspection Report. Attachment 3. The Paint
< - Mixing Slip need not be retained. , -t;. , ['. 1) Verify that primer is applied and pot life is not
- ' exceeded in accordance with Reference 1-B and 1-C. If
'f , a brush technique is used, the inspector shall verify
' that a short bristle brush is used and rebrushing is avoided. - j) Verify that hose length is less than 75 feet. k f l t _- l I l .
- m. .. ..
m.ym ,_,,,mm, m g w :: INSTRUCTION ISSUE PAGE REVISION
}d( /
TEXAS UTiUTIES GENERATING CO. CPSES 9 of 24 QI-QP-11.4-5 lpq . 16 JUL 0 5198)
' g..
5 2 3.2.3 Primer Touch-up Repair (Primer Damage Does Not Extend to j - Steel Surface k The coating inspector shall conduct the following inspections - b: for primer touch-up repair operations when the damage is . l 9 within the primer ccat and sandblasting to the steel - substrate is not required. if .,
~
- h a) Verify surface is abraded Ifghtly then wiped clean per M Reference 1-B and 1-C.- -- -
i b) Perform inspections' (e) through (j) in paragraph 3.2.2. . r
! 3.2.4 Repair of Primer by Recoating ;
The coating inspector shall conduct the following ,-# inspections for primer recoating ' repair. Only two (2) Y y overcoats shall be applied. ,, T a) Verify that the surface has been solvent cleaned or
- T cleansed in accordance with Reference 1-B and 1-C. A clean white cloth shall be used to check primed surface
!4C cleanliness. Contamination, other than rust (red) and
'c: .
zinc oxide (white) stains, is unacceptable and require further . cleaning. f Perform inspections (e) through (j) in Section 3.2.2.
!ph b) jf c) Minor defects (mechanical damage such as construction damage or exposing substrate during surface preparation !ey i. . operations, etc.) perform inspection (a) through (c) in 4 - Section 3.7.2.
'h Major defects (mechanical damage such as construction
.g d)
- g. damage or exposing substrate during surface preparation operations, etc.) perfonn inspection (a) through (c) in
( Section 3.7.3. 3.2.5 Complete Primer Repair (Primer Damage to Steel Surface
; Extends Over Entire Item)
The coating inspector shall conduct the following inspections f to document primer repair when the damage is to the steel surface and requires surface preparation to steel substrate over entire item: D
g-Verify ambient conditions per Section 3.2.2(a) prior to l
O-a) surface preparation. !, ' T. b) Perform inspections (a) through (j) in Section 3.2.2. ' Wj. . , .,
=ca
l:.c. ! h INSTRUCTION NUM8ER REVISION ISSUE DATE p3GE ) h.i 1- TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. . m ES ' QI.QP.11.4 5 16 10 f 24 JUL 0 51983 K I.6
;i?
w fjj 3.2.6 Docmentation of Primer Repair Inspections
$ All inspections required by Section 3.2 shall be documented on an IR, Attachment 3, in accordance with Reference 1 D. ?[. The completed IR shall be forwarded to the PPRV for retention.
k NOTE 1: If the repair is on an item which is fabricated f'. out of several pieces of steel . bearing different EU QP numbers, all QP numbers will be recorded in O the " Remarks" section of the IR. .--
! ,r +
v NOTE 2: All items within the scope of each inspection
!Y: -
which are detemined by the Inspector to be W satisfactory may be documented on a . single - IR. y NOTE 3: A reject tag will be applied to any unsat area', y with the inspection report, inspector's name and l;@y phone extension listed per Reference 1.F.
%:4 y.'N./ 3.3 PRE. APPLICATION INSPECTIONS 2 '
'$ The QC inspector shall verify the following items prior to y applying coatings:
. 3.3.1 Coating Applicator Qualifications -
d 4 The Inspector shall verify (by Qualification Record or list
. E of qualification records in QA File) that the coating
- E applicators on each shift are ., qualified for safety-related
{p coating work. m 3.3.2 Ambient Conditions j t. . 3 The inspector shall detemine air temperature, surface
.. temperature, relative humidity and dew point of substrate
!, structures. A calibrated non mercury filled dry bulb themometer or calibrated temperature recorder (Bristol
],
~
40697H or equivalent) shall be used for air temperature Jj detemination. A calibrated non.aercury wet bulb themometer or a calibrated humidity recorder (Bristol
~l*
l.4 4069TH or equivalent) shall be used to determine relative humidity. The dew point shall be determined by the
, difference in dry and wet bulb temperatures using the U.S.
i , Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables, l- WB No. 235. When dry bulb readings are greater than 100*F, j (c. the dew point should be determined using the 100*F dry bulb 'n ' reading, and relative humidity shall be determined by , , subtracting wet bulb from the surface temperature or ambient mco oA em
~ . . _ . _ . . . . . _ . . ..
- _ - _ _ - - - . . . - _ . . _ . . ~ . . - - . - - _ . _ , . - - , .
1
^~',' .
U . O INSTRUCTION REVISION ISSUE PAGE
'8 NUMBER DATE
'k TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. CPSES 11 of 24 '(j. QI-QP-11.4-5 16 JUL 0 51983 I.; - v 4
.h .
h temperature, whichever is greater. If the dry bulb themometer exceeds 100*F, the instrument shall be returned l$$ to the calibration lab for recalibration. The surface g s. temperature shall be detemined by placing a calibrated ir surface temperature themometer (Omega-Amprobe fast temp. ' j;-) range of 10*-250*F) in contact with the substrate surface p until the temperature reading stabilizes. The pemissible range of surface and ambient temperature for application of finish coat shall be 50-120*F. ,_ ,h Maxima values of relative humidity shall be 85%. U C The surface temperature shall be a minimum of 5*F above 1
;. the dew point.
s Coated Surface Acceptability
~
M 3.3.3
- c
- .
N The Inspector shall visually reinspect the previously coated ,( ,r. ( surface just prior to finish coat application for evidence of contamination (oil , grease, foreign matter) and stains. - M 6 Contamination is unacceptable. All contamination must be
- O removed per Reference 1-B or 1-C prior to finish coating.
1% Rust (red) and zinc oxide (white) stains are acceptable i; >E - provided all loose particles have been removed (as evidenced .@ by existence of no stain on cloth) from the coated surface ,pj . . by approved cleaning operations. Phenoline Thinner or Xylol are approved cleaners for seal toat. Thinner wiping is not
- - recommended for Dimetcoat primer. Use Carboline #33 cleaner f for C211 Primer.
1 ,d . 3.3.4 Air Supply Acceptability 3' The Inspector shall inspect the air supply system (pressure . pots and spray guns) for the existence of suitable filters / lf traps / separators. , d ;- r 'd. The effectiveness of these items shall be verified by placing 41 l a clean piece of cheesecloth (or white fabric) over the exit ,4 of the air lines and allowing air to flow for 30 seconds minimum. The cloth shall show no evidence of moisture, oil i ', or foreign matter when examined.
? g 3.3.5 Finish Coat Mixing Operations U i 3.3.5.1 Prior to mixing, the inspector shall verify that each
.a .
- l u ne. s 3 . . .
I a . . . . 1 h {} 'N 1
.j INSTRUCTION REVISION ISSUE
^ PAGE
,N ^
TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. {: k CPSES QI-QP-11.4 5 16 12 of 24 >d JUL 0 51963 d x s f component is identified by batch numbers _ and .that the j 24 month shelf life has not been exceeded, 3.3.5.2 The inspector shall verify that mixing / thinner operations h- are perfomed in accordance with References 1-8 and 1.C. 'J Thinning may be done up to two quarts of Phenoline Thinner per gallon of Phenoline 305. L 'i 3.3.5.3- The inspector shall verify that the pot life has not expired 1 per References 18 and 1 C. y . . ,f 3.3.5.4. When coating materials are mixed / thinned in locations other .
'n than the field, the inspector verifyfog the mixing operation " shall fill out the Paint Mixing Slip, Attachment 5. The > inspector perfoming the pre-appl.ication inspection shall $ record the infomation from the Paint Mixing Slip on the
[ Inspection Report, Attachment 1. not be retained. The Paint Mixing Slip need
- i
{ 3.4 SURVEILLANCE F SEAL OR FINISH COAT APPLICATION
- k The Inspector shall verify that hose length is less than
- i 75 feet. If a brush-technique is used, the inspector shall
< . verify that a short bristle brush is used and rebrushing is
,j avoided. ,
'E The inspector shall also verify that the seal coat (if L , present) is solvent wiped with Phenoline 305 thinner or
'f . Xyloi prior to finish coat application. '3 o 3.5 DOClNENTATION & PRIMER INSPECTION AND FINISH C0AT s , ?] PRE-APPLICATION / APPLICATION INSPECTIONS
~ '
~ ~~~
]. Results of inspections described in Sections 3.1, 3.3, an 4 3.4 shall be documented on an Inspection Report (IR),
d Attachment 1, in accordance with Reference 1-D. The i lh' completed IR shall be fonvarded to the PPRV for retention. NOTE 1: All 1 c. ems within the scope of each inspection 1 which are detemined by the Inspector to be satisfactory may be documented on a single
. IR.
3.6 FINISH COAT FINAL ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION The inspector shall perfom a final acceptance inspection {. of each finish coated item in accordance with Paragraphs q 3.6.1_through 3.6.5. For finish coated containment liner g
.j . . . . . . .
.:.__ . _ _ _ . . , . . . _ . . , . _ _ _ ..... . _ _ . _ .._,,..L. _. _ - _ . . , _ , . , . , . _ . . _ , ,
q x . .
-- . ch -
g -
.i
.lNSTRUCTION REVISION I
PAGE'
)4 NUM8ER DT TEXAS UTIUTIES GENERATING CO.
g g ( CPSES QI-QP-11.4-5 16 JUL 0 51983 13 of 24 c. 2 d
'i
'Is plate surfaces, the final acceptance inspection shall be
! performed at the completion of the curing period. For all j
other finish coated items, the final acceptance inspection i shall be performed immediately prior to turnover of each j area within the containment building and should be 1 coordinated with Area Management. In addition, finish
, :j coated containment liner surfaces shall be visually 1 reinspected in accordance with Paragraph 3.6.2 insediately prior to turnover of each containment area.
- q 3.6.1 Finish Coat Cure ,
'q
- The QC Inspector may perform a final acceptance inspection'
? after a minimia topcoat cure of 24 hours or minima cure
- for recoat as stated in Reference 1-B or 1-C, Section L 4.4.21 Paragraph 4, which ever is greater. A calibrated i non-mercury filled dry bulb thermometer, a calibrated temperature recorder,' or local weather station may be used.
i,
)
( 3.6.2 Visual Defects Inspection
] The Inspector shall perform a visual inspection of the cured finish coated substrate surface in accordance with the i following:
! ,n !, a) Runs / sags - Runs or sags in which the DFT of the total i coating system is 11.5 mils or less -thick, which show j no evidence of mudcracking, are acceptable. Those
) greater than 11.5 mils shall be repaired in accordance j with Reference 1-8 or 1-C. s
'5 b) Skips / damaged areas / dry spray / over spray / gross 4 discontinuities such as holidays, voids, and bubbles
; are not acceptable.
c) Pinholes - acceptable to the extent allowed by
. Attachment 2.
- i. d) Cor.'.aminatica - Embedded foreign materials unacceptable.
, 3.6.3 Dry Film Thickness (DFT) :
3 The Inspector shall perform a DFT of the cured coating ii system. A calibrated 0-25 E1cometer Inspector DFT Gage . Model III/1E, or equivalent, shall be used. A minimum of b _,-------,,w, ,-19 ., ,...,,.-,m. e .,,.,,+,,,.m.--,-, .,_,_,,...%.,w_, ..,,-.,,,m --hy,,e ._,,,,,_,wa s-,.a y,m.w,w m,-
- ~. .- . . . - . . _ _ _ _ _ _
i I (ci O o + s INSTRUCTION ISSUE NUM8ER REVISION DATE PAGE. TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
> - CPSES ,
QI-QP-11.4-5 16 JUL 0 51983 14 of 24
- )
4 l < i
$' five separate spot measurements (See Note 1) spaced evenly over the structure (See Note 2) shall be taken. Since the u
magnetic gage is sensitive to geometric discontinuities .in
, { the steel, measurements less than 1 inch from an edge or a
.i hole shall be avoided where possible.
u The average DFT of the 1g,331 coatino syster shall be a minimum of. 7.0 mils and ,a maximum of 11.0 mils. The spot test DFT of the total coatina system shall be a minimum of 7.0 mils and a maximum of 11.5 mils. NOTE 1: A spot measurement is a series of three measure-ments in the same general area. The probe should be moved a short distance for each gage reading. Discard any unusually high or low gage reading that cannot be repeated consistently. Take an average of these three gage readings as one spot measurement. .. t* For small areas of coating, 5 separate spot
! ( NOTE 2:
measurements shall be taken. For larger areas, 5 spot measurements shall be taken for every 100 square feet of coating. NOTE 3: Items with appreciable surface curvature and other geometrical discontinuities such as handrails, gratings, stairs, sway struts, etc. shall be exempt i e fromDFTmeasurement(SeeDCA11421). 3.6.4 Continuity Insoection s The coat Inspector using a Tinker shalland testRasor the continuity Model M1(of 67.5 thevolt) cured finish holiday detector. 1005 of the finish coated surface area shall be tested.d, i The applied film should contain only a minor number of points of discontinuity. No more than two points of discontinuity should occur within an area having a radius of 6 inches as measured from a point of discontinuity (pinholes) . No more than 40% of the total number of allowable points of dis' continuity should occur within any i one area equal to 255 of the total area being coated. The i total number of pinhole' discontinuities allowed is defined l . in Attachment 2. No gross discontinuities are allowed. l h: t l
=cm E__.-______ ___._,__.#._ _ . _ _ _ _ _ , , . _ _ _ , _ _ _ , . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ , _ , _ , .,_,___,_.J
l
-L .. . !
{ - i.i
.h ,
h ~ iY INSTRUCTION ISSUE PAGE g REVISION DATE NUM8ER G TEXAS UTluTIES GENERATING CO. N k.: CPSES QI.QP.11.4 5 - 16 15 cf 24 a JUL 0 51983 E)
- 6Q Documentation of Finish Coat / Seal Coat Acceptance Inspections f 3.6.5 Results of inspections described in Sections 3.6 shall be b
,$ documented on an Inspection Report (IR), Attachment 4, in accordance with Reference _1.D. The completed IR shall be h forwarded to the PPRV for retention.-
! ti ' "ie NOTE 1: All items within the scope of each inspection 'l per Paragraph 3.6, which are detemined by the ,7 Inspector to be satisfactory, may be documented
- on a single IR. _ _. _ _ , ~;1 ,
{.1 NOTE 2: A reject tag 'ill w be applied to any unsat area, lu with the' inspection report, inspector's name and
! - 3.1 phone extension listed per Reference _1.F.
3.7 REPAIRS OF FINISH C0AT , l 3.7.1 Repairs of Runs and Sags
- .4 b
- The QC inspector shall verify that the area is abraded until the DFT of the total coating systas, is within 7.0 and 11.5 mils, and examined' for mudcracking.
'i The presence. or absence of mudcracking shall dictate the type of repair required per Reference 18 or 1.C.
!n 3.7.2 Repair of Minor Defects { {.n The QC inspector shall perfom .the following inspection when repairing minor defects (as defined by Reference 18 or 1.C):
^
i a) Verify ambient conditions per Section 3.2.2(a) prior to_
.a surface preparation.
L o b) Verify that the damaged area is blasted or abraded and any exposed steel is ground per Reference 18 or 1.C.
- - , c) Verify damaged area is solvent wiped in accordance with Reference 1 8 or 1.C.
! '.i d) Perform inspections described in 3.3.1, 3.3.2, 3.3.3, i
- ] 3.3.4, 3.3.5, and 3.4.
1 3l 3.7.3 Repair of Major Defects ; 4 .. jb The QC inspector shall perfonn the following inspection when
' repairing major defects (as defined by Reference 18 or 1.C):
,. a) Verify ambient conditions per Section 3.2.2(a) prior to
,- surface preparation. l ,,,,,, m mocooA-(
- i. . . _ _ _ _ - . . -- __-._
- - " - - '"'="#%- *NN " '
- * ~ '
'h
. h g
d INSTRUCTION REVISION ISSUE NUMBER PAGE , , ,l ( TEXAS UTluTIES GENERATING CO. DATE
@SES
{ QI-QP 11.4-5 16 4 JUL 0 51983 hi-t W
- y
,g b) Verify area is abraded or spot blasted per Reference 4 1,8 or 1,C.
.t c) Perfom inspections in Section 3.2.2.
d) Perform inspections in Section 3.7.2(c). a 3.7.4 Repair of Embedded Foreign Particles a;1 The QC - -inspector shall verify that embedded foreign [ particles, are removed and the surface. recoated per Section ,t 3.7.S. - 3.7.5 Repair of Pinholes and Discontinuities, Over Spray, Dry Spray and/or Overcoating i1 a)
- Verify all loose particles are removed and area is solvent wiped.
b b) Perform inspections described in . 3.7.2, except l) pirholes and small dicontinuitibs may be repaired at 4 the time of final inspection without a later i s reinspection of the repair, . 3.7.6 Documentation of Repairs All repairs shall be documented en an Inspection Report, *
', Attachment 1. Repairs involving application of primer will be documented on Attachment 3. %
3.8 MAPPING OF LARGE AREAS 2 , ii t For large areas (such as reactor containment liner plate) which have received coatings prior to 10/23/81 (Issuance date of Rev. 5 of this procedure), a unique number shall be assigned to the original inspection checklist. This number will be transferred to the area on a map drawing to provide traceability to the original checklist. For any coatings i applied after 10/23/81, the IR number shall be transferred I to the area on the map drawing. The map drawing shall be maintained by the QC Supervisor, or his designee, until the entire surface has been coated. At this time, the completed map shall be transmitted to the Permanent Plant Records Vault.
' k.*
NOTE 1: Separate maps shall be maintained for the prime, seal and finish coats. mese seeL t Tusco on r
-am,-.c +--.c.-ww+,-----m--..,,.--,,---,.s.uc-c.,-%-,, ,w.,- - , - -# x g.---.--aw,,m--w.- .-,s.-e-.-e -
+we-- wy,,- g -
. ,?
- r
[ 1.3
- C -1 INSTRUCTION ISSUE s' 4.7 REVISION PAGE
^.. NUMBER DATE
- i TEXAS UTluTIES GENERATING CO.
CPSES i QI-QPv11.4,5 16 17 f 24 JUL 0 51983 a i 4 NOTE 2: If the coated area applicable to a given IR is
. irregular in shape, a sketch should be attached to the IR to indicate the - extent of the area 7
inspected. NOTE 3: Coating repairs requiring recoating shall be 4 mapped, but repairs only requiring touchwup need not be mapped. 4'. NOTE 4: The following parameters (as necessary) should be ' ~ considered for description of areas on the' sketch: a) - Bo ttom a'nd top elevations (vertical and
~
i diagonal surfaces) or elevation of surface (horizontal surfaces). b) Dimensions in relationship to azimuths, column lines, reactor centerline or other components of known location. ( c) Quadrant, .anpartment, cavity or room in which inspection is located. ,
~ ~
d) Unit ntaber.
, e )- Relation of surface to cardinal directions (i.e., North, South,.etc.).
i I i
~! .i ;
i 1 i *
.5 l,
~
a . i . 1 : j ! TUOCO OA 1 _
- ~
~ ,h -
- o
- h. h' e.
.+
INSTRUCTION I dd; NUMBER REVISION PAGE
.i - TEXAS UT!uTIES GENERATING CO.
. ( CPSES
.( , QI-QP-11.4-5 16 JUL 0 5 ISM 18 of 24
$:. ,.. ATTACHMENT 1
,y
.s .
W w
!if -
U. i ?.. j 00MANCHE PEAK STEAM El.ZCTRIC STATION 9
.fj ,-.
INSPECTION REPORT * , irns ham pumwunon na, usras/ sinucruni amenanen f. PROTECTIVE COATINGS d , . s ww.o. m. w.u. occ. a arv. a enames no. an - an insi sw. .our so. o 72 AS-31 , , Ql-QP-11.4 5 Rev. - - , , C 3"MV, - OMN OP847Ynon N O Fa* , O Pa g , ,
~
u.en assia.ra ' Al, O s.s,eenas coin Tro.46 annucaste ivius sarwactone nstaN - an en m. - o., um. ui.T ,T y ~ a'= [ Tens no. = a ' w oc c g,0NwAITRIEIM --. 7 .DATRN-"rDRf*IIllllll-i<
- a . a ,,
SEAL CDAT PINIMt 00AI k' ORIGINAL REPAIR
- 1. iRECORD ALL PROCTECTIVE C0ATINGS UN!QUE QP & 10 NO.'s:
1(FOR MULTIPLE ITEMS INDICATE IN " REMARKS WITH
.l CORRESP040tNG OFT READINGS FROM ITEM #3 ABOVE.) PER' PARA. 3.1.1.a t VFQfry PerMFR etrnF PFR PARA 1"1 1m
- 3. PERFORM VISUAL INSPECTION OF PRIME 0 SURFACE PER PARA.
~J 3.1.1.d
- 4. prRFORM OFT OF PRfMFR enAT Pr# PARA _ 1 1 1.e (FOR MULTIPLE ITEMS Itt01CATE MIN. SPOT. MAX. SPOT AND AVER- .
AGE OFT FOR EACH ITEM IN
- REMARKS *)
I. 5. PERFORM VISUAL INSPECTIONS OF PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACE PER PARA. 3.3.3 A vrnfry tireraer ponpanaoffnw accrpTaar r pro repin no CCP30A
- 7. AM8IENT CONDITIONS CHECKE0 PER PARA. 3.3.2 PRIOR TO COATING APPLICATION a
RECORD: DATE: IIME: W.B. 0.8 S.T. 0.P. R.H. (CONTittUED ON SHEET 2 of 2) 1 l .,
=
*~' **"C""
LR. Cu2 SED Q
- f oc ,,,,cron .
- j. Penn#m t TUGCQ CA
h I. INSTRUCTION ISSUE NUMBER REVISION PAGE i
" TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. DATE
( CPSES QI-QP-11.4-5 16 JUL 0 51983 19 of 24 l i ATTACHMENT 1 (.CONTIflVED) I i *
,- 4
. COMtJeCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRtc STATION INSPECTION REPORT QI2QP-11.4-5.*R. _
gms,igym sheet of 2 FOR FULI. HEADING 3. SEE SHEET 1 -- NO. iftas g agagg e.C. sea, INSPECTION ATTRisuTES g e smansu
,, 5 _o 8.
1 '-- VERIFY OVALIFICATION OF APPLICATOR (S) PER PARA. 3.3.1. - LIST: l l .
- 9. '
APPLICATION METHOD: g SPRAY BRUSH i
- 10. VERIFY AIR SUPPLY ACunABLE PER PARA. 3.3.4 *
- 11. VERIFY HOTE LENGTH IS LESS THAN 75 FT.
12.
! VERIFY MIXING OPERATIONS ARE PER CCP-30 OR CCP-30A AND t PARA. 3.3.5.
- 13.
3 COATING MATFRfAf PE6iuff"T fDfmirFirlTION*
- RECORD BATCM NthEFiit-h PART A; PART 8:
- f 1 TurNNER:
1 TIME MIXED: 0Aff 14 VERIFY POT LIFE AS STATED IN CCP-30 AND CCP-30A IS NOT EX-
.y -. CEEDED PER PARA. 3.3.5.2. ,1- -
{ m s
. r ut misWM1 1 M' .
. s WM F ' P' "'
SS* 5 J ROIAAK3 (Dwes,ptca,tTcJ
- 1^.
I , 1 - i I l l ..
.Q
==<- " '
11 i.a.ew = a 8
' = a= -
8 GC JesPtC704 g e ese me, i *00 0^
^
. . _ , .L .
. 2 + n : ~2
~L- - - '~
*'M"^ -
. lif' ny _ _. . . _
' "sh -
p., INSTRUCTION ISSUE
- ~-' REVISION PAGE
. ;$ NUMBER DATE TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
m ' '- CPSES
- , .[). -- QI-QP-11.4-5 16 JUL 0 51983 .
20 of 24 G$
't.-
.i'.S N Attachment 2 t?!.'
- 3. -
- e a
J.? 21 . h.c w W 4 k.
- e. TOTAL NUMBER OF ALLOWABLE POINTS OF DISCONTINUITY dM e
.'A.4 SURFACE AREA CONO. "C" g
BEING C0ATED _ COMERCIALLY
.g (50. FT. ) - CONTINUOUS e,-
y 10 5 q gg. y : 13-50 10 k ' g , i 50-100 20 m t
.f
- y 100-500 30 a ??
g.u
~ 500-1000 50 f,j 1000-5000 75 id h'] .. - Gross Discontinuities - None Allowed.
ki M b.
.q
.y ~
'E
.'.h i .-
g.8 8 A 4 . ;t j 1 'i t . _ . . "
7 . t .6 E
\ @
h ? - INSTRUCTION REVISION ISSUE PAGE fJ NUMBER DATE g TEXAS UTIUTIES GENERATING CO.
.; L cPSES h; QI-QP-11.4-5 16 JUL 0 5 in 21 of 24 P
} l. k 9 - Attachment 3 i .I C0uancat *EAx STEW E'. E:Taic s TATioN em- r $:d sftM crictafics INSPECTION
.CDTiiiGAT.'m 10 REPCRT p LT s.L= / iT4%G RAE sEJ.Gh4TG4 j PROTECTIVE COATINGS ,; ,l .
a vu m ao au a c.cc. a qv a :.um.a io maas u .m sw szw. = [tj - A5 31 .l efQI.0P.11.45,Rev. 2 .
- j O l",,%, ss, o D?ce';.fhgr'c= Ogg j;g C r.a,yyg,,,,,
Omyg, , inse. nesusts O insnenoa co-terro . u. u ecasts arrus sarsacroar 48 - 1 O iasneno= comatario, w 32risrae car irrvs unrto sc.ow
% %1** ' ' "' s
""" " I INSPECTION aTTR18UTES carg
,) ; 3,,,$ n;,g
~,.s / .2..* s1 ?
- 1. ( For repair of saas and runs over 5.5 mils DFT. Derform IIl l '
$] l OFT of Primer Coat in areas which have been sanded or l l l ? l screened per. Para. 3.2.1. (for multiple items, indicate ! l8 I '
]}
j 4 l Min. Spot. Max. Spot and Average DFT with correspondino l l l
) QP & 10 No's for each item in " Remarks.") l l RECORD: Minimum Scot Test: I l Maximus Spot Test:
- l !
e i Average DFT: 11 l
? 2. l Abrasive acceptable per Para. 3.2.2.b. I l I -
[ 3. 1 Separators installed, c' rained, and drains left a l l l
, i cartially open. 1 il l '
- a. i Air succly free of contamination. ll l
; 5. Blasted or power tooled surface and profile: Il y a. Surface and surrounding areas cleaned per
' i Para. 3.2.2.d. l .
d . s. j h. Surface free of foreign matter incl. grease A oil l ' . l l _ l c. Sharp (non-rounded) projections removed l l l I d. Anchor catter's decth 1.0 mil. minimum i I I a j l e. Surface lightly abraded per Para. 3.2.3 i l i
- j i f. Surface wiped clean per Para. 3.2.3 or 3.2.4 l l 6 1 j l (Repairs Only) l l l j 6. I Unioue Number stamped on piece (s). Record Unioue i I l i 2
l Number (s) in " Remarks
- below. I I l f 7. I Ambient conditions checked per Para. 3.3.2 prior to i !l l
; I primer aco11 cation and record below: l l l !
1DATE: TIME: WET BULB TEMP: l l l l 3 l 0Rf EULB TEMP: RELATIVE HUMIDITY: Il l 8
, . DEW POINT: SURFACE TEMP: ! l! l i
- 8. Substrate surface free of contaminants and less than l ! l
, h,. 24 hours elaosed since blasting. 'l I j i (Continued on Next Sheet) l ! l
, PennNe6I
..,_:,~'~ * ~ ~ ~ * ' ~~ ~ 5. . . :." -
^ ~ ~ L ~,m.+ .- ___ :~:
1 1 e
-1 . r . , .
_r..._.___.._. . . _ , - -..__.:. - . . - . . . - - xW
;;lE IOSTRUdTION REVISION ISSUE N NUMBER DATE PAGE g TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO.
.. \ CPSES b 16 . - JUL 0 51983 '22 of 24 a QI-QP-11.4-5
.D .
.c -
5 Attachment 3. Sheet 2 ne sa g , Q CDIdANCHE P(Aft STEA48 EL1OTRIC STATION gg.qp.gg,4.g, ggy, h inspection REPORT Sheet of E (N B ltf rruns OAfg 4. C.
;,j sea
,, e INSPECTION ATTRieUTES . g e =
[
-i senatusu
. r3
- 9. Tran. filter er-emnarmene inet 11ad n., nara 3.3.4.
- 10. Air supply fewe of contamination.
g , ,
- 11. Quaf fientian of annitentne. (List Aeolicatorst)
- 5. ' 12. Verify mixine Operations pet care. 3.2.2.h.
U 13. Costing Material Product identification h a. Base tot No.: PART A: h -ElYrLetNo.: h c. Thinner Let No.:
?d d. Time Mixed:
. ...ey ;.. -- . . . e
- 14. Pressure pot agitated. .
d : k - 15 . Pot life not avranded.
- 16. Mose less thaa 75 feet.
y . ms
'.:4 -tR kAw
& ausMuhz'
}; NMM *
'A A*
C " s
.f
' y. -
;. i
- =
.M l
I L j
, REMAAK3s (mses.m.stcJ ,
6 i V V l .
..s?
t,
. 5..
d
. 1 -
b
' **"" es Mn LR. CLD4ED Q , , , , , ,
9 laan 8 Oc meestC704 g
- . l
.e.
i-L. Fenn No.1 TUGCO CA
^r
- - '*f ,
pf .
~
v , f 8 INSTRUCTION
'RUISION ISSUE PAGE TEXAS UTluTIES GENERATING CO.
NUMBER DATE CPSES V jij .u, . QI-QP-11.4-5 16 JUL 0 51983 23 of 24 -
.J
. :Q. o I b Attachment 4 As . .
.>1 .
4 . . . . . . . .
.t.l .
g
, A.
, 0008ANCHE PEAlt STE.AM ELECTRIC STATICet ,
If8WECTION HEPORT um
. i l N -- i .use gpuvurvumansruus E mu es usu / u s seuse stMi l -- uque M OTECTIVE COATINGS s s
- a wus.na suv. in u - esi 1sur suu= swis.=a ,
AS-31 e
.l uy, as. sea, a nuv.
QI-QP-11.4-5. Rev.a snames na
, n
._ OP M _ C Mo= O rt;Tettr,',e,= t Oh ,gg , _.
j
'g
$ E comers,au.=ue a - . - o
- m. urwa.=,
us dNb g w-- -- f Tsu me, n. INSPECTION ATTRl8UTES oc
- - $ cars mm *
, ,, FINISH COAT FINAL ACCEPTANCE a e a -
- 1. Verify curine is ner CCP-30 or 30A and nara. 3.8.1. !
, , 2. Perfom Visual Insnection of caated Surface ner nara.
~~
3.6.2.
.,}a
(
- 3. Perfom DFT on eaated surface as nor nara.1.8.2 (For multinla items indicate Min. sant. Max. Saat and
*C, Aversee IFT with carw-dino 0F 1 ID Na's for mach
- t .-
- itsu in " Remarks"),
i 5.9 Coatine $vstas Scot Test Minisam: r .?- Coatine System Spot Test Madaum: - f.M Aversee OFT Costine System: } t)h R 4 Perfo s continuity insnaction ner nara. 1sa
! p i G '
as
?. --
W 4 i v~ S g ,. g W
,b' i ?i i
g . i nonames (sues, specs, TcJ 4 d 4 q
, ;,t
- io ~=-. -" '
-f e
g a. e- a l-ar- - oc sospecton . C.l
.)
,, , TUCCO OA
(~ } I l 1. J' . 4 i i i
}<-
Attachment I OI-QP-11.4-10, Rev. 12, (Jtily 6, 1983) a l 'k . . _ . ___ ., __ _. . _ . _ _ . _ _ _ . . _ , - _ _ _. _ _ . - _ , . . , . , _ . . . - _ . .
g. h
- t _ _ _
1 TuxAs unumas oaNERAUNG CO. ' Tug " REVIS!6N.... Ih PAGE y _. _ . . _ ... . . . . . QI.QP.11. 4,10 12 1 of 20
.IUL 0 6 G83
" INSPECTION OF CONCRETE PREPARED BY: -
M//I E 7 N M 87 SUBSTRATE SURFACE
# j
_ _ PREPARATION AND COATINGS APPROVED BY: . APPLICATION AND REPAIR O APPROVED BY: * *
/T' ' '
22 ' $pTEfff
. . (j __
DATE
1.0 REFERENCES
1-A CCP.40, " Protective Coating of Concrete Surfaces" 18 QI.QP.11.0 5, " Inspection of Concrete Repair" 1.C CCP-30, " Coating S and Radiation Areas ;{ .543raten 3dij d.diss id$rtsfalt{ ' Rfak o} Building 10 CP.QP.18.0, " Inspection Reports" 1.E QI.QP.11.4 24,. " Reinspection of Protective Coatings on i Concrete Substrates for Which Documentation is Missing V or Discrepant" 1.F CCP.13, " Application of NUTEC 10 Curing Compound" 1G CP.QP.15.0, " Tagging Systems" 2.0 GENERAL 2.1 PURPOSE AND SCOPE s !
. This instruction shall describe the methods used by Quality Control personnel while perfonning inspections of applica.
tion of coatings on a concrete substrate inside the Reactor ) Containment Buildings. 3.0 INSTRUCTIONS I ( Application of 11, 115 and 1201 shall be per Sections 3.1 through 3.6, 3.0 and 3.9 and application of NUTEC 10 shall be per Section 3.7. t l 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The concrete surface shall be cured a minimum of 28 days prior to application of protective coatings. If the concrete f ,'_ surface is cured with NUTEC 10, coating may be performed 1 v after a minimum of 6 days after application of NUTEC 10. kk h g e
- - - - - . - . , . - - * - , . . w .- . . . --.,.-------,.%
-. - - , - - ~ . - , - . - - - - , - - . . - - - - - - . * . - - - , - - - - - - - -v-w-
.o .. _ . . a - 4 $ INSTRUCTION REVISION. ISSUE PAGE N NUMBER DATE TEXAS _UTILITIEN GENERATING CO. CPSES
- QI.QP.11.4 10 12 2 of 20 u
JUL 0 6 1983
}
ii A . sj 3.1.1 Preblast Cleaning Operations 4
.{
Prior to surface preparation, the QC inspector shall ': ~ . visually examine the surface to be water blasted for heavy
. deposits of oil and grease.
- Any heavy oil or grease i
. deposits shall. be removed by steam cleaning, trisodium 4 ; ; phosphate washing with a mixture of 3 6 pounds TSP per gallon of water,. or use of an Imperial recommended detergent.
- l 'The QC inspector shall also verify that any detrimental
, . surface irregularities such as-projections,- fins, or ridges shall be removed by bush hammering, hand or power tooling, , grinding, or stening.
t + NOTE 1: The problast visual inspection is required only when surface preparation is by one of the following methods:
, a. Water blasting
- b. Water blasting with sand injection
- c. Dry sandblasting y d. Bush hammering I
3.1.2 Surface Preparation 3.1.2.1 Methods of Surface Preparation Water blasting, water blasting with sand injection, acid etching, sand blasting, and power tooling are all acceptable . methods of surface preparation. If NUTEC 10 curing membrane has been applied and gives a " glossy"' appearance, the surface shall be abraded without completely removing the t i NUTEC 10 prior to application of the surfacer. The QC inspector shall note the method (s) used on the Inspection Report (IR), Attachment 1. The inspector shall i verify that the method (s) used are in compliance with l Reference 1-A. In the event TSP is used, the QC inspector shall verify that the area is flushed with clean water. If sand blasting is used, the QC inspector shall verify that a try, filter, or separator is installed in the air line.
, 3.1.2.2 Post Blasting Operations '
After surface preparation .the QC inspector shall visually examine the surface to verify the following: ( a) The surface shall be free of construction dust, ggeg an,dyoggegsits, and all adjacent areas f MMI {*
~ ~ - - - ~ ~ ~ - ' * " ~ " - - ~ * ~ ~
_ _ _ _ _ _ . _ . _ _ . , _ _ _ _ . _ . . ~ _ _ _ . _ _-_ _.,__.. _ . _ ._. - _ _ _ _.- _ ...,_ _ _ . _ . - - . . _ _ _ . ~ - _ , _ , . . .
~
(b I
. . TEXAS.UVUTIES GENERABNG CO.
CPSES D. QI.QP.11. 4 10 12 Jllt. 0 6 M83 3 of 20
! l 1
f
; b) All holes greater than 1/2 inch in depth are repaired ; with dry pack or epoxy grout in accordance with i
Reference 18. c) All sharp projections removed. d) Markings (ink, pencil, chalk, felt tip marker, etc.) solvent wiped in accordance with Reference 1.A. ,
,_ e) Marking paint removed in accordance with Reference 1.A.
f) Objects protruding from surface are ground or cut smooth until object is flush. g) All loosely adhering objects embedded are removed. h) Smooth embedded objects such as plastic or steel roughened. Metal objects are power tool cleaned and solvent wiped.
- 1) Metal objects larger than 4 square inches are primed in accordance with Reference 1.C; j) Surface is free of grease, oil, and curing amabranes.
If grease and oil remain after TSP cleaning, the area shall b1 chipped out and repaired with dry pack or epoxy grout and inspected by Civil QC in accordance with Reference 18. ,, 3.2 MIXING OPERATIONS 3.2.1 Material s The QC inspector shall verify that the materials to be used are in accordance with Reference 1.A and 1.F and that each component is identified by a batch number. The QC inspector shall also verify that the shelf life (See Attachment 2) has not expired. NUTEC 10 har an expiration date marked on the I container and it shall not be used after that date. 3.2.2 Mixing / Thinning The QC inspector shall witness all mixing / thinning operations, and verify that'aixing/ thinning is perfonned in accordance with Reference 1.A and 1.F. Induction times for g ' finish mixes are shown in Attachment 2. l Pome fee, t
INSTRUCTION ISSUE PAGE REVISION NUMBER DATE TEXAS.UTIUTIES GENERATING CO.
.( CPSES QI.QP.11.4 10 12 4 f 20 R 0 6 583 l
3.3 SURFACER APPLICATION 3.3.1 Ambient Conditions The inspector shall determine air temperature, relative humidity, dew point, and' surface temperature of concrete substrate. A calibrated- ' non-mercury filled dry bulb thermometer or a calibrated - temperature recorder (Bristol , 4069 TH or equivalent) shall be used for air temperature determination. A calibrated non. mercury filled wet bulb thermometer or a calibrated humidity - recorder -(Bristol 4069 TH or equivalent) shall be used to determine j relative humidity. The dew point shall be determined by the
- difference in dry and wet bulb temperature ut.ing the U.S.
Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychrometric Tables, W.B. No. 235. When dry bulb readings are greater than 100*F, the dew point and relative humidity should be determined using . the 100 F reading (note in Remarks Section). The surface l temperature shall be determined by placing a calibrated Range 0110*F thermometer or equivalent in contact with the surface b to be coated. The' thermometer probe shall' remain in contact I with the surface until the temperature reading stabilizes. 4 + Minimum and maximum values of surface and ambient temperatures shall be 50*F and 100*F respectively. , Infrequent dips in temperature to 40*F is permissible during
- application and/or cure; however, the elapsed time the i temperature is below 50*F shall be added to the cure time.
1 Application of the coating shall not begin unless the
- surface temperature is 5*F above the dew point. Pot life shall be as stated in Attachment 2.
3 Humidity may vary as high as 100%; however. free standing water shall be removed. Coating application over a damp surface is permissible. Under no conditions shall NUTEC 11S l be applied to a surface containfog free standing water. ! Methods of identifying free standing water are shown in Reference 1.A. j 3.3.2 Surface Acceptability The QC inspector shall visually examine the substrate surface immediately prior to surfacer application to verify
, that it is free of contamination (dust, l aitance, loose
- deposits and markings).
penn me,i
. . . . - .. ... . ~. -- - - - , - - - - - - _ . - . - , . . ...-.--=,.-+.---,.we--,---+,---*-.--,-wv.,..- %-,--.www,...----.,v.--r-,_,.,e -,,,% --.,,-...ew,s,=,,,,,--,,.---,,--w--,.-,ys.,w%c.+
. G 6 INSTRUCTION ISSUE pggg REVISION TEXAS UTluTIES GENERATING CO.
]. CPSES QI.QP-11.4 10 12 5 of 20 JUL 0 61983 3.3.3 Air Supply Acceptability The inspector shall inspect the air supply system for pressure pots and spray guns for suitable filters / traps /
separators. The effectiveness of these items shall be verified by exposing a piece of white paper or cloth to a blast of air for approximately 30 seconds. The cloth shall. show no evidence of moisture, oil or foreign matter when examined. 3.3.4 Po t Li fe _ _ _ The QC inspector shall verify that the pot life as shown in Attachment 2 is not exceeded. 3.3.5 Qualification of Applicator (s) The Inspector shall verify (by Qualification Record or list !]e ! of qualified appifcators from QA file) 'that the coating
! -s applicators on each shift are qualified for safety.related j
j coating wrt. jh 3.3.6 Dry Film Thickness -* 2 t
- ! The QC inspector shall detamine the DFT of the applied lla surfacer by taking wet film thickness spot measurements and multiplying account anyeach reading)by thinner used . Athe % volume minimum solids of five (5) (taking separatein
; spot wt film thickness (WFT) measurements (See Note 1) spaced evenly over the coated area (See Note 2) shall be e taken.
NOTE 1: A spot measurement is a series of three j measurements in the same general area. The WFT gage should be moved a short distance for each
! gage reading. Discard any unusually high or low t gage reading tnat cannot be repeated consistently.
Take an average of these three gage readings as i one spot measurement.
} l NOTE 2: For small areas of coating, five (5) spot measurements shall be taken. For larger areas, 5 spot measurements shall be taken for each 100 l , square feet (or, fraction thereof) of coating.
Thickness of surfacer may vary between 10 and 35 mils. (See y Attachment 4 for method of detemining percent volume solids.) e .m , meco on
--er er -s e -e-=--o- wv**-us*--m--v--+w--v-+m----m--
1 G O 7 .. .. INCTION REVISION ISSUE PAGE~ TEXA8 UTluTIES GENERATING CO. L QI.QP.11.4 10 12 M 0 61983 6 of 20 r 3.3.7 Surfacer Repair Work 3.3.7.1 Repair of Runs and Sags
.t Runs and sags which show evidence of mudcracking shall be abraded flush with the surrounding surface. If after abrading, surfacer is unsatisfactory, remove unsatisfactory coating to substrate and reapply the surfacer. If after abrading the surfacer is satisfactory, no further repair is necessary.
3.3.7.2 Repair of Embedded Foreign Particles Embedded foreign particles shall be removed by abrading. ~f unsatisfactory coating still exist, then the area shall be repaired in accordance with Section 3.3.7.3. NOTE: Rust stains residue, not necessarily the stain, shall be removed with bristle brush and water or Imperial Thinner #0L-54. 3.3.7.3 Repairs When Touch Up or Recoating is.Necessary For repairs that require either touch up or recoating with
- NUTEC 11S, NUTEC 11 or NUTEC 1201 in accordance with Reference 1.A. the QC inspector shall
a) Verify ambient conditions are acceptable per Section
- 3. 3.1.
b) Verify surface has been prepared in accordance with
, Reference 1.A and is free from loose and foreign materials as per Section 4.3.1 and/or Paragraph 4.3.2.5.
, c) Verify acceptable materials (per Reference 1-A) are used, and shelf life is not exceeded.
! d) Verify that NUTEC 11S, NUTEC 11 or NUTEC 1201 is mixed / thinned in accordance with Section 3.2.
e) Verify pot life is not exceeded per Attachment 2. f) Verify qualification of appitcator(s) per Section 3.3.5. g) Visually inspect per Section 3.4.2.1.
' b h) Verify that curing is in accordance with Section 3.4.2.2.
e.,in me :
" 0^
. b I INSTRUCTION ISSUE REVISION PAGE I
' e
~ NUMBER DATE -
TEXA& UTIUTIES GENERATING CO. U CPSES QI-QP.11. 4 10 12 JUL 0 0 1983 7 f 20 f) Verifv dry film thickness in the repair area is in accoraance with the following millage requirements: NUTEC 11S 10 35 mils NUTEC 11 3 - 20 mils 1 - 16 mil s NUTEC 1201 , NOTE 1: See Section 3.3.6 and Attachment 4 for DFT calculation, using Wet Film Thickness measurement and percent volume solids. 3.4 FINISH COAT APPLICATION 3.4.1 Preapplication Inspection i 3.4.1.1 Ambient Conditions i Prior to finish coat appifcation, the QC inspector shall detamine ambient conditions in accordance with Section 3.3.1. 3.4.2 Surfacer Post Application Operation - 3.4.2.1 Visual Defects Inspection The inspector shall perfom a visual inspection of the surfacer coat NUTEC 11S and NUTEC 11 prior to the finish coat application for the following defects: a) Runs or sags which show nosevidence of mudcracking are acceptable. b) Stains - rust (red) and zinc oxide (ef te) stains are acceptable provided loose particles are removed from NUTEC 11S or NUTEC 11 surfaces prior to appitcation of i finish coat. c) Dry spray, over spray, damaged areas, skips, holidays,
' blisters, bubbling, fisheyes, orange peel, mudcracking, oil and grease, and embedded foreign material are all
. unacceptable.
Contamination is not allowed. It must be removed per
, Reference 1-A prior to finish coat.
Unacceptable conditions will be repaired in accordance with
- br' Reference 1 A.
i penn na i
" 0^
J s. INSTRUCTION REVISION ISSUER PAGE
- I NUMBER DATE TEXAS.UT1UTIES GENERATING CO.
_y. CPSES QI.QP.11.4 ? 0 12 m () 6 23 8 f 20 -l 3.4.2.2 Surfacer Cure The inspector shall monitor ambient temperature after the surfacer is applied to detemine when cure is adequate for topcoating operations to commence. A calibrated non mercury filled dry bulb themometer, calibrated temperature recorder or local weather station data may be used. Curing time shall be as follows: Curing Time Before -'
~
Temperature 0*F Topcoating with 1201 50 59 72 hrs. 60 69 48 hrs. 70 79 24 hrs. 80 89 18 hrs. 90 100 12 hrs. Temperature durations below 50*F will be added to the cure b time. NUTEC 11S may be touched up or recoated with #11 or #115 as soon a:: the initial coat has dried such that the paint shall not adhere to the thumb when downward pressure is exerted on the paint film while turning a 90* angle. (This does not refer to the two pass application method.) 3.4.2.3 Air Supply Acceptability s
- The QC inspector shall verify the air supply is acceptable per Section 3.3.3.
3.4.2.4 Qualification of Appifcator(s) The Inspector shall verify (by Qualification Recon 1 or list of qualified applicators from QA file) that the coating applicators on each shift are qualified for safety.related
) coating work.
3.4.3 Finish Coat Application 3.4.3.1 Pot Life The QC inspector shall verify that the pot life of NUTEC 1201 has not been exceeded. Pot It fe is shown on b . Attachment 2. a n= = ""
b . 1 INSTRUCTION ISSUE PAGE REVISION TEXASUTluTIES GENERATING CO. QI.QP-11.4 10 12 Jt1L 0 6 1983 9 f 20 3.4.3.2 Dry Film Thickness The inspector shall determine the DFT of the applied finish coat by- taking wet film thickness spot measurements and each reading by the % volume solids. A minimum multiplying of five (5) separate spot wet film thickness (WFT) measurements (See Note 1) spaced evenly over the coated area (See Note 2) shall be taken. NOTE 1: A spot measuremer.i; is a series of three measurements in -the same general area . The WFT gage should be moved a short distance for each gage reading. Discard any unusually high or low gage reading that cannot be repeated consistently. - Take an average of these three gage readings as one spot measurement. NOTE 2: For small areas of coating, five (5) spot measurements shall be taken. For larger areas, (, 5 spot measurements shall be taken for each 100 square feet (or fraction thereof) of coating. (See Attachment 4 for method of determining percent volume solids.) The total DFT of Nt1TEC 1201, recoat and existing coat shall not exceed 16 mils. j 3.5 FINISH COAT REPAIRS s For repairs in the NUTEC 1201 Finish Coat, the QC Inspector shall verify the following: a) The inspector shall determine the DFT of the existing coated surface (prior to recoating) by either, or one
- of the two following methods.
l
- 1) Using the DFT readings acquired during the backfit i docismentation (Reference 17).
i 2) The scratch test of the REACTIC 1201 finish coat 3 shall be performed using a Mark II Tooke
- Inspection Gage equipped with a 2x tip. Five i ,
separate readings spaced randomly over each finish ! coated area of 100 square feet or less shall be I taken. (' 4 4 _ . . . .. ..
-w,. - - _ , --.%+-ew-s-----4m-r,w+---weve, ,.s e.---.r-, -,wwe.-m s-
.c
. $. h -
INSTRUCTION MSION IS8UE p4gg
.. TEXAS UTIUTIES GENERATING CO.
] CPSES QI.QP.11.4 10 12
~
10 of 20 JUL 0 61983 9 .
' NOTE: Tooke tests are not required to be performed on areas on concrete which have not been j
i finish coated with REACTIC 1201. g i b) Verify that the surface is prepared as required by ( , Reference 1.A.
- g. I
. c) Verify that runs and sags which show evidence of
l '] mudcracking are abraded ' flush with the surrounding
- ? ' " surface. If after abrading the finish coat is still !
-~ unsatisfactory, verify that unsatisfactory coating is __
removed to the substrate and repaired per . Steps (c)-
! through (j) below, c
'I l d) Verify that all loose particles and foreign particles ,3 l are removed from surface in accordance with Reference 1.A.
. a j ,
e) Verify that the surface is solvent wiped in accordance i: with Reference 1.A. { -) f) Verify that NUTEC 1201 is mixed / thinned per Section 3.2. *
- i g) Verify air supply acceptability per Section 3.4.2.3.
j h) Verify that pot life is not exceeded per Section 3.4.3.1. j i) Verify appitcator(s) qualification per Section 3.' 4.2.4. j) Verify cure time for regoat. Recoating time for , NUTEC 1201 is 24 hours. k) Verify dry film thickness of the recoat per Section l } 3.4.3.2.
' K0TE: The tie in interface between concrete coatings and steg1 coatings shall be inspected during the finish coat final acceptance for steel coated
. items per QI.QP.11.4 5.
3.6 FINISH C0AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION PRIOR TO AREA TURNOVER
!sundf ately prior to turnover of each area within the RCB's, i
a final visual inspection in accordance with the following subsections shall te perfo' rued on exposed finish coated concrete substrates. L. pain m i " ""
INSWCTION REVISION ISSUE pagg
. . . . TEXAS UTluTIES GENERATING CO.
QI.QP.11.4 10 12 l1 f 20 R 0 6 50 l 3.6.1 Finish Coat Cure Prior to perfoming finish coat final acceptance inspections, , I the inspector shall verify that the finish coat has cured for i the minimum of 24 hours. i 3.6.2 Finish Coat Continuity Inspection i 4 3 The QC inspector shall visually inspect the continuity of l .. the - finish coat after a minimum cure of 24 hours. The maximum number of permissible pinholes is shown on
- , J. Attachment 3. No more than 2 points of discontinuity shall i occur within an area having a radius of six inches (using 4 a a point of discontinuity as the center of the circle). No l
~! more than 40% of the total number of allowable points of
' discontinuity shall occur within any one area equal to 255 j
l I of the ' total area. The pinholes that are beyond, the 3 acceptance of Attachment 3 shall be repaired in accordance with Section 3.5 and 3.6.3.6. b . 3.6.3 Visual Examination The QC inspector shall visually examine the finish coated surface for the following defects:
- i '
! a) Runs and sags which show no evidence of mudcracking
- are acceptable. Unacceptable runs and sags will be
! repaired in accordance with Section 3.5. I b) At the time of the finals inspection, pinholes and small discontinuities may be repaired with no reinspection required of these areas. ' I c) Skips, holidays, over spray, damaged areas, blisters, bubbles, dry spray, excessive orange peel, fish eyes. l . and gross discontinuities will be repaired in accordance
. with Section 3.5. ,.
.' d) All contamination (foreign particles) is unacceptable, j Area must be repaired per Section 3.5.
e) color and Gloss Unifomity . the coated surface shall have unifom color and gloss. Those surfaces which are nonunifom shall be repaired in accordance with Section
- 3. 5. This requirement shall not be applicable to ' areas exhibiting runs and sags which have been abraded.
semi seu
**00 8"
F G @ TEXASJJTIUTIES GENERATING CO. N
= - %T# == .
i QI.QP.11.4 10 12 12 of 20
; JUL 0 S 1983 1
j 3.7 APPL ! CATION & NUTEC 10 CURING COMPOUND 5 3.7.1 The QC Inspector shall verify that the areen concrete has been cles.ied per Reforence 1.F. Paragraph z.0. 3.7.2 The QC Inspector shall verify that NUTEC 10 is not applied
, ?
under inclement conditions and that the surface temperatures are above 50*F. Areas of visible moisture or standing water are unacceptable.
~~3.7.3 The QC Inspector shall verify that the NUTEC 10 air supply '-'
and equipment shall be in accordance with Reference 1.F. NUTEC 10 may also be applied by brush or roller. 1 i 3.7.4 NUTEC 10 shall be mixed per Paragraph 3.2. The NUTEC 10 i has a pot life of (1) one hour at 75'F. If the NUTEC 10 ! e gives the appearance of a crawl and does not penetrate the t - conerste, the material shall be removed from the concrete > i by solvent and a clean cloth. . All the expired material l shall be discarded and the equipment shall be cleaned per Reference 1.F.
! 3.7.5 NUTEC 10 shall be appifed in accordarice with Reference 1.F.
l , Apply NUTEC 10 at a spreading rate of approximately j 350 400 sq. ft./ gal. 3.7.6 The QC Inspector shall verify that during appitcation of , NUTEC 10, areas with sags, surface irregularities or i excessive buildup shall be removed with solvent and a
! clean cloth. Reapply NUTEC 10 in accordance with I
- Reference 1.F.
i i . 3.8 DOCl#ENTATION l Results of all inspections discussed in Sections 3.1 through ! 3.5 shall be documented on an Inspection Report, Attachment ( , 1, in accordance with Reference 1 0. Results of the l inspections discussed in Section 3.6 shall be documented on an Inspection Report, Attachment 5 in accordance with ! Reference 1 0. Results of all inspections discussed in l Section 3.7 shall be documented on an Inspection Report ( Attacheent 6) in accordance with Reforence 1.D. I NOTE: A reject tag will* be applied to any'unsat ' area, : with the inspection report, inspector s name, and l phone extension listed per Reference 1.G. h.
-, ===
. m.... . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . ..
_ _ _ ..._.. _ ._ _..~... _ . _ . _.._. _ . . _ _ .. _ _ _ . _ ._._._. _ . _ _ , _. -._
l l - i N ON REVISION PAGE
.. m N cO.
b- QI.QP.11.4 10 12 13 of 20 JtJt. 0 6 1983 i 3.9 MAPPING For each IR generated in accordance with Section 3.3 and ! 3.6, a sketch shall be attached to indicate the location L and size of the applicable coating application (See Note 3).
! The individual sketches from each IR shall be used to prepare composite maps dich shall cover in scope a specific room, '
compartment, quadrant or cavity within the Reactor Containment Buildings. I l For concrete surfaces dich have-received coatings prior to
! - 11/11/81 (issuance date of Rev. 2 of this procedure) a unique neber shall be assigned to the original inspection checklist. . ! : This number shall be transferred to the applicable area on i ,,
the composite map in order to provide traceability to the , . original checklist. For any coatings applied after 11/11/81, the IR number shall be transferred to the area on the composite map.
! y The composite maps shall be maintained by the QC Supervisor, or his designee, until the entire surface in a given area has been coated, at dich time, the completed map shall be transmitted to the PPRV. 1 NOTE 1: Separate composite maps shall be maintained for 4 the surfacer and finish coats.
1 . l NOTE 2: Coating repairs requiring recoating shall be i mapped but repairs requiring only touch up need not be mapped, s l NOTE 3: The following parameters (as necessary) should be
. considered for descriptions of test areas on the l sketch.
i a. Bottom and Top Elevations (vertical and diagonal surfaces) or Elevation of Surface . (horizontal surfaces). -
- b. Dimensions in relation to Azimuths, column lines, reactor centerifne or other components of known location.
- c. mother concrete substrate is wall, ceiling, floor, been or column.
l f
=co m
l l 1 .
~ ..
INSTRUCTION. ISSUE PAGE REVISION
. . Taxa!umuTIES. GENERATING CO.
NUM8ER DAM -
.. ("
CPSES QI.QP.11.4 10 12 14 of 20 JUL 0 61983 o
- d. Quadrant, compartament, cavity or room in which inspection area is located.
i e. thit number.
$ f. Relation of surface to Cardinal Directions 4 (i.e. North, South, etc.).
I i I b s i . I I 6,
- 1 t
' *000 CA
%=i
g - g i INSTRUCTION ISSUE pggg
' REVISION NUMSER DATE TaxAsursuTIES GENERATING cc.
cPSES 12 JUL 0 61983 15 of 20
. al-QP-11.4-10 ATTACHMENT 1 1 i
C:ll3aAN CHg aCK STEA:A L.Z *2ic !?AT:CN
- 1 ,
. 2 INSPECTION MEPORT gan cc. xicmsr.c.s PROTECTIVE CdAffNG$ z.i.cer.rsa;.en s .imrus, smen.as ;naw ci.
wr 4 .m i ur 2 . ;cc. a m a ; w .ss ,o % u s .a m sm apr w AS.31 ,l a? QI.QP.ll. 4 10 Rev. 4 , C I"M.Ec's CE",MM*" M.4dy!EeT '2'sD<e :.n . D U d cm ,. M AESUI.f3 . , C seecma tawutts . u.:. as=ucanor are.s sar aract:mv C i===c== ca utre, u n=cto. it:4 untes w. ** '" *"c ' *a **
.cr INSPECTION ATTRIRU*E3 g$$ mag
} cart
} l COAT NO.: $URFACER FINISH COAT '
.Il t t '
~ ! ORIGINAL REPAIR I L i '
( 1. ' VERf FY SURFACE FREE OF GREASE AND O!L PER PARA. 3.1.1 ! l' (REQUIRED ONLf IF SURFACE PREPARATION 15 BY QNE OF THEg l l i l t FOLLOWING:) 'l l ; I I a. WATER BLASTING l i I b. WATER BLASTING WITH $ANO INJECTTON l l 1 1
- c. ORY 5AND 8LA5 TINE. } .
) l l t d. BU$H HAf9tERING l l t i
- 2. * $URFACE PREPARATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH CCP.A0. LIST i e' f METH005 0F $URFACE PREPARATIONr i t ' '
s i i i i ?
- 3. i VERIFY $URFACE PREPARATION ACCEPTA8tE AND ALL LOOSE AN6 i :
., i FORE!GM MATERIAL REMOVED PER PARA. 3.1.2.2. i t l
- 1. I VERIFY ColeCRETE CURINrt/ REPAIR $ COMPLETE ($URFACER ONLYl i i t
- I PER PARA. J.A. and J.l.Z.Z) g a e
- 5. I VERIFY CURE TIME OF PREVIOU3 COAT 8EFORE FINISH COATINS i ;
PER PARA. 3.4.2.2 (FINISH COAT ONLY) I t i
- 6. i RECORO TOOK GARGE REA0!NGS PER PARA. 3.5 FINISH C0AT i i l '
- RfpAfR1 ONLY1 Mfft. OFT! l I i '
f
- MAX. OFT: AVG. OFT: i ; l 9 .
I 7. VERIFY COATED $URFACER FREE OF UNACCEPTA8tE DEFECTS l l ' Pat 08 TO FINISH C0AT ONLY PER PARA. 3.4.2.1 e . I
- 8. VERIFV Mf f!NG OPERAf f 0NS PER PARA. 3.2 I '
- 2. Ift? MAffRfat MAlef . I I I l 0. 8ATCH NUM8ER($) 0F MATERIAL: l .
e THINNER CURING AGENT i ! l (* . BASE FILLER
- 9. ' VERIFY THAT THELF LIFE OF COATING ftATERIAL$ HA$ NOT 8 g EAPlHED.
- ICONTINUE0 GM NEXT PAGE)
Tul8CO GA flussisem
- l INSTRUCTION REVISION I pg
/ - NUMest L texas urtuTies emea.NERATING CO.
QI-QP-11.4-10 12 JUL 0 6 583 16 of 20 ATTACHMENT I (Continued) cmamcw asm mm m.scrme rrarion 4 ) INSPECTION REPORT QI-QP-11.4 10."R. (suPetsNetra4J !Aest 2 of 7
... .. _. .. a..
FOR MR.L HEADING 3. SH 5HET 1 NO.
~
ifes eats e. c. me, INSPECTION ATTmeuTas - somitsu n - , 3 *a .. to. VERIFV OUALIFICATION OF APPLICATORS (Lf 5T APPLICATOA$1 I i
- 11. VFRfFY AMRfrNT cfwnfffnN1 PFR PARA. 1.1.1 inny nin n. wrT nsa n.
ItnerArr Trup nrw enfMT. IRrtaffvr HtminrTY.
- 17 vrefry Afa tuppty rarr nr enNTAasfMATfnN ann THAT inAD
- Ff1TFRt'. AND KFPARATORT ARE INtTAlIfn j 11 RECORD WET FILM THICKMESS? t I
fa TVnf f at tnl f fM-nrT = wrt u i voi tru NIN nFT. MfM nFT-I MAL IFT? MAI. DFT? *
-avg. WFT! AVG. OFT
. (REGOAD ADDITIONAL SETS OF REA0!NGS IN REMARKS)
, . N' M NN i % i t l
,yl.A.C.04ED C ; ! *" oc .me? n i
- T'JeCO CA muun sem t
_ . . .~ . 2 .. .
INSTRUCTION 1 PAGE NUMBER. REVISIOy 0 TEXAS.UTIUTIES GENERATING CO. (.. CPSES QI-QP-11.4-10 12 JUL 0 6 1983 17 of 20
. ATTACHMENT 2
~
Material Shelf Life t!utec 1: Base & Curino A ent 12 months Nutec1:SBase&CuringMgent 12 montfis Nutec- 1201 Base & Curing Agent 12 months Thinnners and Sand Filler Unlimited POT LIFE NUTEC AND NUTEC 115 ; an. 4.7L
= ]
b .w. l x m,
.. .. _.. .. ... ..-Y
% 50 4,0 *)O '.80 % J00 TP1PERKruRE 'Y I G+ _
-g NUTEC' 1201
./t.4 '
/truff 2 HRS, lof
+H
.. .- .. . .- . ..r.. ... ..e .
.se* se* w* ao* v sos"
EMPERATUME **F _
INDUCTION TIMES FOR' NUTEC _1201 Temo. ('F) l 50-59 . 45 min. 60- 69 30 min. 70-79 20 min. 80-90 '10 min. ka 91-100 None 1 I pesesee t
- - - , - - . - - _ _ . _ -.--,__,.,.--.-._._.,--,,..-._,-_._._--_._.,,-..r_._,,- , . , , . - . - _ . - - . . . . . . . _ . - . . . - . .
'~
eg g INSTRUCTION REVISION ISSUE PAGE SM DATE TEXAS UTi!.lTIES GENERATING CO. CPSES ( QI-QP-11.4-10 12 .,ygt a g 1983 18 of 20 ATTACHMENT 3 Total Allowable Number of Surface Area (sq. ft.) Points of Discontinuity Up to 10 1 10-50 2 50-100 5 100-500 10 500-1000 - 15 1000-5000 25 No gross discontinuities are acceptable. L ATTACl#9ENT 4 - Percent volume solids for unthinned concrete coatings are as follows: NUTEC 11 - 78% NUTEC 115 - 88% s NUTEC 1201 - 54% EXAMPLE: 11 mils WFT X 54% = 5.94 mils 0FT l For thinned mixes: I Volume of unthinned coatina
% Volume Solfds = Volume of unthinned coating + Volume thinner
%VolumeSolids(unthinned)
(- NOTE: In above equation, volume must be expressed in the same unit of measure. i
%g, TUGCC CA l
.' ~
. .. yx 25E~
t Q'u
." ,K ;%
4 L, INSTRUCTION REVISION E PAGI NUMSER DATE TEXAS UTILITIES GENERATING CO. cPsES 12 JUL 0 6 1983 119 of 20 QI-QP- 11.4-10
,. m 6
ATTAC}WENT 5
.L J
, , .p.,..
CoasA86 CME PEAtt STEAM ELECTRIC STATION _ J/N IHWECTION MPORT F g ;. , pr.. ives essam nium -n== mm. i. - -- - - PROTECTIVE C0ATINGS , 4 . ur4Elgik BEV. sur. EE GE. 5 fiEV. 4 eMaNEE NO. Im GUE isas a wes . eurwe s . M ! s e 0!-OP 11.4-10. Rev. 4 a C 1" M ,, C MT38" CI"8g?@ C @,,,,,gy,,, OFS ,
! map, asma.rs ,
C IlugBtcTION Coelm,ETRO . ALI. ApuuCAeLE ITrase satisPactoRY i O iiissecte= co=urse. uasarincrea, ime ustus se6o. **'"*"** ***- i e ettu mit . - ' INSPECTION ATTRIOUTES
- 6 3 OATE '. nag n es 3 9 s FINI5H C0AT FIMM. ACCEPTNICE
(
- 1. I Verify cure of finish coat per Pers. 3.6.1. -
l .. l
- 2. } 'terify finish coat continuity per Pers. 3.5.2.
- I f . 3. ) ytsually inspect finish coat per Para. 3.5.J.
! l I u 1 I 4 I % i I u l l i ! I t l 4 1 l T t l l t I i l i i j , l l
==== E ,=cs. erca l
i G - i
**'"***"*' i.n. ca.osto i **" i seman-
't 0 ! I et aspecTee n l
l Segum 2 1 g, _ . . - . _ _ _ . ~ , ..~mm......._, .,-._,,,.e-----,,,,,..,x.--...---, -mm_..-.,,,,...~-,-,-.,_ . . - , - . - - _ - _ , , , . ,
i l l
- D @ -
, y.
r INST 81UCTION ISSUE pggg 6 -< NUMGM e OATE TEXA8 UTIUTIES GENWIATING CO. - 12 JUL 0 61983 QI-QP-11.4-10 20 of 20 f. .i l
. ATTACHMENT 6 1
boesaascw Ptaas STEAas Mc Ric STAT:ose i i . 1
- i. NISECTICII NEPCft? F i .
-m ____i
- NUTEC 10 m i -
- - _ - =v. w. er aus. e suv. a sammen m = - en _ _- . . .sm AS.11 s a Of.0P.ll.4 10. Rev. f a . . .
i 08". 2 2: CP &1D W.'"" Cr" m ar C r"m.,,, angs,, , I a= u- r. ll C ensumus comuuves, ass assunama ffuse safusesTeme ). O m commuTW. uness,Wastest efsse usTW eass '" e sfas e. . gg 8805W71010 ATTRtW TES e. g garg m, a m I 5 m
- 1. Verift ea=*reta has " ef-^ " aar para 1.7.1
- 2. Verify that IluTfc to in sat analtad - -- fact- t ewittens ner Para.1.7.2 .
- 1. Verify that the MITfc 10 af r tunniv and anut- '
t 11 in i accordance with Ref, l.F. oer Para. 3.7.3. *
- 4. Verify eining operations per Para. 3.7.4.
- 5. verifv auaitfteattaa of analtestars (tfit amm1tratarti _
oer Para. 3.3.5. j - j . a Verify the anelfcation rata of Eifff to aar Para.1.7.1. s I 1 l l ! l
- 7. Verify coated surface free of unacceptable defects. sets, j
surface freeaularitime or enesative buf1d un aer Para. l 4 1.7 8. ' I
} l l l l l1 '
t l l l l aanssue tsum,seems,e,tJ 4 . w
" " " " N **#I fienef W 9f1.4.Cu3atD = '
ec septene el filun m 9
. i
. .. .? e . . . .
l Attachment J Sample Painter Certification Records I
BROWN & ROOT, INC. P RE REVISION PAGE CPSES
-0 11 8/16/83 1&1 JOS 35-1195
[ k II ~ lROWh & ROOT, INC [l f((lYi~.I'hii v.d. ] ]3 RECEIVED BROWN & ROOT, INC COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRI [ \' r? .p kJY"2- ,b# ' 0 )T24i:9 t % STATION +"ll1()
" "* PAINTER QUALIFICATICN h m 6 0UALITY ASSURANCE GENERAL DATA I $
October 23, 1983 Date Report Number TECHNICAL DATA Name of Painter Clyde Fisher U428 547-50-3544 (Badge) (Social Security No.) Sumary of Field Experience Employee has had previous experience as a painter. He/she has been employed in the Paint Department since February 14, 1983. Experience with Following Product Types Zincs, Phenolines, Epoxies, Latexes, Enamels, and Thinners. Application Test for Specified Substrate He/she has perfonned a demonstration of proficiency test with, the Nuclear Steel Coatings Class (_ Carboline) used on this project. . Additional Qualifications (School) He/she has attended a two hour instruction seminar for CCP-30 (. Carboline) on September 28, 1983. Signature A/ . M /J.ej.y Applicator's Field Supervisor Distribution: Painting Supt. Q.C. Department Tugco QA Vault (Original)
5 BROWN & ROOT, INC. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE REVISION DATE PAGE NUMBER I CPSES
-0 11 8/16/83 1 0F 1 JOB 35-1195 BROWN & ROOT, INC.
1 [Qk'M 10N COMANCaE eEAx STEAs ELECTRIC STATION qg K Brush Only g h 1. PAINTER QUALIFICATION RECORD GENERAL DATA Date 5-14-84 Report Number TECHNICAL DATA Name of Painter David Eason FJ25 230-82-9705 (Badge) (Social Security No.) Sumary of Field Experience Emoloyee has had previous experience as a painter. He/she has been employed in the Paint Department stifa 1-23-84. Experience with Following Product Types Zincs, Phenolines, Epoxies, Latexes, Enamels, cnd Thinners. Application Test for Specified Substrate He/she has perfomed a demonstration of proficiency test witri the Nuclear Steel Coatings Class (Carboline) used on this project. Additional Qualifications (School) He/she has attended a two hour instruction l seminar for CCP-30 (Carboline) on 5-10-84. l Signature %%Sd ' Applicator's Fiel upervisor Distribution: Painting Supt. Q.C. Department Tugco QA Vault (Original) i M_"C
- _ , - _ l
n f , d I 3ROWN & ROOT, INC. PROCEDURE EFFECTIVE NUMBER REVISION DATE PAGE CPSES CCP-30 11 8/16/83 1 0F 1 , JOB 35-1195 t ( i . d ; b C ' .,' O T * [*t ,i g
* * * \"*f' I L V O &ROWN & g997' ,;..j BROWN & ROOT, INC.
j RECEIVED
# g- COMANCHE PEAK STEAM ELECTRIC STATI0f MAY13 u; m PPRV PAINTER QUALIFICATION RECORD rar m GENERAL DATA OUALITY ASSURANC Date 5-18-84 Report Number l
TECHNICAL DATA ! Name of Painter Guadalupe Garcia FR32 455-45-8615 (Bacge) (Social Security No.) Summary of Field Experience Emoloyee has had previous exoerience as a cainter. He/she has been employed in the Paint Department since 4-27-84. g Experience with Following Product Types Zincs, Phenolines, Epoxies, Latexes, Enamels, and Thinners. Application Test for Specified Substrate He/she has perfonned a demonstration of croficiency test witti the Nuclear Steel Coatines Class (Carboline) used on this project. Additional Qualifications (School) He/she has attended a two hour instruction seminar for CCP-30 (. Carboline) on i;_1_g4 . Signature O 3 f41 - Distribution: Painting Supt. Q.C. Department Tugco QA Vault (Original)
g Attachment K Sample Painter Certification Record form recommended by ANSI 101.4-1972
;.a.-. - - . + . - . . . . . . .
~
_ .a -
- SAtT.E 7093 5C PA!3'"!R QUAI,I?! CATION ?I'*0RD
' CINERAL DATA DATE PROJECT DESICXATION RIPORT No. PROJECT LOCATICM PURCHASI OROIR NO. Ok1tc , XIII,DINO, UNIT, CR MUIPMENT Colf!RACT NC. DESICHATICN: = SHCP .0RL. TD %'ORK 71.Lin!?a'_ UATA NAME CT PArt"Ih . S'J NARY 07 FII*.3 IX?I2*CO2
, ~e EXPIRII3CI WI"E PCI.LO*.00 P30CUO" Tf?ES
. g.f AFPLICATION *IS" TOR SPECITIZ3 SL"JSTRATE SIOUAT'.,RZ_
C'='JI3 3 US 61??I.SCTATI7: SIGNAT'.'RI A!PM OA"03'S F*II3 5"J?I2VISca Distribution: i I i t i 5 17
c- . 1; Attachment L Sample form for inspection record recommended by ANSI 101.4-1972
\
l 1 l I l
I
. . l iff I ' ! te Ii! .Ig Elg tI.. I. I'. O-
. . a b
i T T I M D O s I GI F D ) T O P 7 E t 4 l O I ( T S . A S G L F V T L D P E N A E O C
- : ti I S S W .
- o. A T k N I A
D G M N
? R t
l O I O F . T . P P A E T I O N R F E C 14 l h 1 l t a 1 S 1 C E E t
) P l s
. D l
S U T l o i A E. N W N G T I I I h c L D S T t A E a l I B Y t l L K E P h S T P t A A i M ( W
- : 'F.
l . F t D i C D T T h O A D i t ti I H C P
. A O S ti r S A M C i T E k T T )
A . N E c O P C
- t I A A 0 e T M Ft 0 a r i 11 .
t P ui l I L' k r
. s H u W m l g
N O E e v Y n., R n a l IL T I A F i t c A T A O e o G I A it f N P F e I M E D T t h A D P y O L n C E A A C T. l A F C W J l . h A s A M U s
)
N: t W fts l S U O T u B e I T T . s T A C A E I L C I s o e C I P E F l l> L S h S l l P N a P I G A G . 8 l a
% i N u T L3 l 1T A N t A u 5 O n O C I r C T L
T A a p W -s l I s t r se O et a t e c ums D. s e ro l k c l A r l l S a e lHE a = l e. f N ME i
- O f f 8 I o ,
o T g
. r p
A t s C s . O e e s L t r s , u E d o e t e d e m r i d n a T - u e A l m n C N c m E : J t n u e A l I T ~ ( i c e 1 e i a s R s t e
- t z _
s u t a. s - r i i 9 p s t s W 6 y a
= ie
=
t ( gWu E e a 4 t N . 9 K e 8 MI 0 _ sa M l a l g O T 0 3 _ C A
- Attachment M Carboline Company letter to .
Brown & Root, Inc. dated October 26, 1976
m
., .m -
- .....r..
u.y . .. .: ,m.... _.
.. , . s-e smygpisT.
,- n u...-. .
..: . . . v.. ,
. e. ,.:. . . . _ . ; x. . ..w.-n: -
a .. . .
. .b . $ '-
gh.n e.c cem7==
;a . 1 Ca.PbCE.H r il e
_- /e - BUS 30'JNI 303 No. 35-11p42OTECTIVE COATIN GS Qi r
. g=a 9 E C E I V Esa@aosion assistance . warsaaaooriac . riac raorre UCO^ i
. p y 17 . - OCT 2 91976 ; h- ==a w^~'ar in ousraiai couar R ;p* 4,. z., sr. L,o u i s , M o. a s 44
- p. , .
E i E C EI V E M october 26, 1976 Brown & Root, Inc. , P.O. Box 1001 Glen Rose,. Texas 76043 l Attention: Mr. H. C. Dodd, Jr., Proje.ct Manager
- - Subjec* - .0ctober 15,. 1976 Meeting of Ma==~e 7"T'"a Chupak, . -
Keith Falk, Nick Gagliardo, Ralph McGrane, Henry 3za* ary, Roger Tegtmeyer and Seymour Fiebach (Local Carboline R'epresentative) at Gibbs & Mill Office, New York, N.Y.
Reference:
Texas Utilities Service Company, Inc. r'nmmanche Peak Steam Elect =ic Station ' ' ~ g C~ c"""'""-"'","#''"' Gibbs & Hill Inc.'New York, N.Y.
' ""i"*i"5 Gentlemen: . .
It was agreed at abcVe referenced Gibbs & Hill caating that the applicai:: ion procedures and fi.bs thickness raccmmendations presented in the Carboline letter to Gibbs & Hill of Octcher 21 (synopsis of discussion at Brown & Rcot mee*4 ng of Octcher 15; reference Brown
& Root let*=* to Texas Utilities' Services cf October 13) would be acceptable for implementation if proper docu=entation of conformance with applienble. ANSI stindards is provided to the job site. This in that let+ a- of documentation. -
The following recomandations for applicatien of Carbo Zinc 11 and Phenoline 305 Finist wi'1 meet the applicable ANSI. criteria noted. l Specific points are in order of reply to the points of the October 13 ! letter f em Brown & Root to Texas Utilities Services.
- 1. It is our reccm andation that the ncminal dry film thicknesses for the specified system is carbo Zinc 11 at three mils /Phenoline 305 Finish at four mils. However, the dry film thicknesses recommanded as the specified minimum is 2.5 mils for Carbo Zinc 11 and 3.0 mils for Phenoline 305 Finish. We recognize the following Allowable Deviations frca Specified Dry' Film Thick-
~
nesses '(ASTM D 1.043 Special Technical Publication Chapter 10) : gv 1 ;
*f A i
\
w ..
/ - .
( CARScLINE CCMcANY e 350 HANLEY.INDUSTMIAL court e 57. Leuts. MtS5 cur 183144 - - . ~ * ' *
. .. p . R " .h.w: . .
..y..
- A- A c.s k m vwM ~ ev - ' ' - * " " ' ' ' ' *" r & ' s
^
i ' j , . _
- c. as"honne * ..
-Mr. R. C. Dodd, Jr.
j< '- h October 26, 1976
.Page 2 D
Specified Film Spot Test Maximum Average Spot
- Thickness ,
Minimum Elm Thickness Test Maximum 2.5 mils
- 2.0 mils * - 5.0 mils
- 6.0 mils
- i 3.O mils 2.4 mils 6.O mils 7.O mils
- Interpolated values
- As documentation of this recommendation, we have enclosed Carboline
- Laboratory Test Report 4-997 wherein Carbo Zinc 11 at three mils /
Phenoline 305 Finish at four mils passed the PWR/BWR LOCA of ANSI N101.5-1970 (currently. ANSI.N101.2-1972). The dry film *h4 rhess readings reportsd reflect an average value of both high and icw spot readings similar to that above. -
~2. 'It was agreed upon 'id TEE B'ro'dREBE ETeeting of October' 15 ' ' ' '
i that if the dry film +hiehess readings are uniformly adjusted by the magnetic +h4-hass gauge reading on the bare, abrasive
- i blasted substrate, that this will not be a problem. However,
. the values for' dry film thickness reported in Carboline
- Laboratory test reports of LOCA. Performance - do not reflect this method of film thickness measurement since -it is not so
},,
;g, C specified in ANSI N101.2-1972 and ANSI N512-1974. Figures should then be adjusted by the average reading over the 1-2 mil._ blast profile of our panels which is approximately 0.5 ,
mils. - - j l 3. Per ASTM D 1.043, S*=nd=*d Technical Publication Chapter .10, 9.1.1 "where possible, runs and sags shonid be repaired by brushing out the excess wat material to give a smooth film of the specified *h4rhess." However, in the cases that the runs and sags are identified in the cured film, ANSI 101.4-1972, sub-section 6.7.2 and 6.7.2.1 define "tne folicwing i typical remedial actions he taken . . . major runs or sags i' should not be accaptable. If any do occur, they shall be ~~ removed, by suitable means, to the bare substrate or to the ! i previously acceptable coat, and then the areas shall be . ( recoated. Minor runs and sags that do not affect film quality l and/or coating perfo n=nte may be permissible." Runs and sags in Carbo Zine 11 normally do not affect film integrity or performance and can be abraded off. If there is a loss of integrity such as areas of muderacking, abrading will result in delamin= tion of the film from bare steel. Therefore, it is our recommendation that all runs and sags (by definition flows of excessively applied coating) "that were not repaired while wat shall be removed by suitable means such as sanding
^
.. or grinding" (ASTM D 1.043 Stand =ed Technical Publication 10.9.1.2). A major run or sag, then, would be a run or sag
' N,. Q,)., that when abraded results in delamination to bare steel and thus must be removed to bare steel and repaired as specified. ,
, Runs and sags that can be removed without affecting the film l [- can be considered minor runs or sags.and are permissible. ;
t 1 1
. e- NO:
a; .;g& i .<
.:.v f. .w.~ -
c..
'..~,
i I y ,. . . .F . ,}:3-Q: f',: V* ., ' y l %- . . c .. ' ~ , t
.f %.4;.@sM.M W ,nh;'..%21% h:x+ ~nw w "c*+~ ~
- n . $%"+vn C : + v "
1- -
'oan=.5 oI!na - .
I $ Mr'..E. C. Jr. October 26, 1976 .
~ 'O Page 3 1
1
- 4. Where the dry film *h4 chess has been identified as being.
below the specified =4 n4=um, the recommended procedure for 4 repair in accordance with ASTM D 1.043 Special Technical Publication, Chapter 10, Section 10.9.2.2 is to apply an additional coat of inorganic zine primer. In this case, special require.sents for this application consist of the ' existing prima coat being cleaned, i.e. , free of oil, grease, dirt, rust st=ining, cement, visible moisture, and other , . contamination, and the subsequent prima coat be thinned 50%, i.e., two quarts of carboline Thinner #33 per gallon of carbo Zine 11. Two coats of carbo Zinc.11, plus Phenoline 305 Finish has no effect on the LOCA performance as you will note on the enclosed Carboline Laboratory Test Report SR57. Where the
- dry film *h4r%ess harNda identified as being
'~
above the specified maximum film +h4 chess, the following recommendations apply. Per ASTM D-1.043, Special Technical Publication, Chapter 10, Section 10.9.3.2 " localized areas of excessive film thickness that are not acceptable may be .i i . treated as runs or sags." Therefore, at the applicator's
'. {
i( discretion, areas of excessive film *h4 Wn' ass may' he' removed by sanding,, grinding or abrading with screen wire. alternative is to sandblast back to bare metal and recoat as The other specified. -
; It should also be noted that areas of dry spray should also he removed by abrading, nor nally with screen wire.
- 5. This problem is no longer pertinent as long as problems 1 and
- - 2 have been resolved.
- 6. Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-PA-2-73T, Appendix A.6, Proximity to Edges requires a =4'N= of 1" from any -
. . geometrical discontinuities unless the magnetic thickness
~ gauge is calibrated under precisely similar conditions. -
i i l ,
- 7. Two conditions apply to areas requiring touchup. Where bare j steel is not exposed, the dry fi.l.m thickness should be checkad
- , and if necessary an additional coat be applied as the same
+ for areas with film thickness below the specified =4n hum. If bare steel is exposed, the area should be sandblasted and recoated per specification.
- 8. The inspection method of taking five spots of three readings each per 100 square feet is in accordance with Steel Structures s
g Painting Council SSPC-PA2-73T was mutually accepted.
... t .
, '---ww- ,,,-, .n,- y wwy-- -g -
--,oc,eww-+---_ ---._____._-1.-
Q :< 5,: 3 ; M :;u t :- M a s. - h- n#:neNMcMi'*=- ' '
- %+ ' u j -
- 1. . .
. .a ! .- =
- s. .
p,'~ i.
, .a i carabellne 6
- l. e.,Mr. H. C. Dodd, Jr.
. .?;;
- -" October 26, 1976 ~-
h Pags 4 n
! 9. The problem is handled by resolution of numb'er 6 and number 8. .
- 10. Since areas of less than the specified minimum film thickness ;
need only be recoated per number 4, no limitation is necessary i on the area relative to repair of low milage. , In addition to the above items, c.'ncern was also expressed as the .d definition of small areas relative to brush application. The , agreed upon size limit for brush application is one square foot or , .. 144 square inches.
~
2 g We believe the above to be satisfactory documentation. If there - j.*u are any questions, please direct them to out Field Representative, ;; Charles Rushing, or to this office directly. '.O Very truly yours, *. j',
/~e / ::4 l':2 L .l.f'.J. Wiegers 'y -~
H C.harles . Power Industry,. Managers . - f).3 9 CJW/rs jg.
, 201 _ -
Enclosures:
CLTR SR57 & 4-997 . .. .. " occ: Messrs. Julius Chupak, Keith Falk, Nick Gagliardo, Ralph McGrane, . Henry Szat: mary Gibbs & E111 Inc., 393 Seventh, New York, NY 10001 "i 7.i 65
- 1 e
..~
.s
. . . . W . . .e e . . ..
. .1.
($ W N
*3 -
g p% .;.;
* ( 's-Id 9
a.r.
, - ,- - . . . . .-- ,,- . --- - - - - - - - . - - ~ . - - - - , - . - - . - , - - - . . . - - - - . - . . , - - . - - . .
1 1 10-13-76 35-1195 Brown & Root,lnc. east arrice sox log., gig sten.2rexas 7eo4a
.e %
October 13, 1976 ' wno-
.w -
Mr. C.H. Gatchell Texas Utilities Services, Inc. P.O. Box 1002 Glen Rose, Texas 76043 Texas Utilities Services, Inc. Comanche Peak Steam Electric Station 1980-82 2300 MW Installation Containment #1 Paf6 ting. gProblems Needing* Resolutions
Dear Mr. Gatchell:
As requested by TUSI/G&H in the October 12, 1976, Civil Jobsite Meeting, below is a list of paint-related problems which warrant resolution.
- 1. Need to have wider thickness range on the prime coat. No tolerance is allowed Applicator. (Define use of 3-5 mils.)
- 2. Need to have Inspector Thickness Gage Readings accepted without .5 mil thickness removed from readings due to testing of sand-blasted metal prior to application of primer with the same magnetic thick-ness gage that is used to test the primed surface. Nace T-63F sheet says this is not a recommended procedure.
- 3. Need clarification of major and minor runs and sags both fmm the Engineer and !!anufacturer. (Reference ANSI 101.4).
4 Need clarification of acceptable repair precedure that is accept-able to both the Engineer and Manufacturer. (Hi and !.cw build, etc.)
- 5. Need to have clarification from Manufacturer on mil thicknesses pertaining to " peaks" and " valleys" of blast-cleaned surfaces.
(Blast Profile).
- 6. Need to clarify distance from edges of areas inspected pertinent to mil thickness gage manufacturer recommended. Zormco Electronics says no closer than 1 inch. Q.C. Inspector states as long as both points of gage are contacted to the surface.
- 7. Need touch-up procedure detailed that is acceptable to both Engineer l and Manufacturer.
- 8. Need to have inspector tests taken in more than 5 areas on 100 s.f )
using only 3 spot checks as basis for average. (Take more reading, ; in lieu, of minimum). , l e s'
/
. / .
/
BrownfrRoot.inc.-
.BRF-3703 Page 2 01606 223.
9 .' Need to have more than 4 - 3 poi _nt spot checks of areas 'vhere edges are predominently.taken to be used for averaging thickness for acceptance or rejection of coating.
- 10. Definition of "small area" reictive to repair of low-i,.
Very truly yours, BROWN & ROOT, INC. st b '& g H.C. Dodd, Jr. v Project Manager HCD/Gh}4/sn L d. Ashley (ll) P.L.Bussolini(1L) M.M. Fitch/L.D. Pyeatt (ll) C.H. Gatchell (0, IL) H.C. Schmidt (6L) Bill McFarland {.lL} P
=
4
, w - - . --
n.,y , , --- - - y
i Attachment N Carboline Company letter to Gibbs & Hill, Inc. dated July 14, 1976 i
'i.b'%1 , L ..3:;4,_ ;; % - -
g.g.,
,. M .' * . ..
- - - = --
e .
. q- . aaca coo sia
- l C'*'ooo o,
. .-.*r..
'a f ,
l p o ... :.. . case.s CAROOCO sts.ouse
't g* = => - >===
j
.a r.'
'.4-C%INOuIne . .
y
't .
- pt OTt CTIVE CO ATIN G wSarsneRO OFING e FtMC PROTECTION e ROOFING wo.,asr4Nc c
. ... couwowsN N
a 33g NANLEY IN DUST RI AL COURT s r. s.o u r s. M o. e s 44
. July.14, 1976 .
- .. rry :n:semary e
611111, Inc.
,,i ren Avenuo .
ceerk, ticw York 10001 ,
- ..a, j ect : Comanche Peaks
- . ar llenry:
confirming -our phone conversation the other day, we di'scussed the procedures for applying a thin film tie coat of Phenoline It 305 over the carbo Zinc 11 on the Comanche Peak project.
.., in the intention to use this thin film as a tie coat to be , . ,, .,
(Q. ) topcoated later with a full coat of Phenoline. 305. Our recommendation would be to thin the Phenoline 305, approximately two quarts per gallon with Phenoline Thinner, and apply the PhenolineTo 305 at acat dryafilm thickness of it approximately one mil. top:: year or so lator would be necessary to. thoroughly solvent wipe the existing 305 surface with an appropriate thinner to insure that all ' contaminants are removed prior to topcoating. If any additional information is required, Please,do not hesitate to contact Seymour Fiebach or this office directly. .
- Very truly yours, CARBOL 1,3ECOMPANY
.h .,
- Charles Wiegers ,
Power Industry Manager CJW:kff/202 . cc: Mr. Seymour Fiebach/Mr. Charles Rushing k - p% a s
~.e. .
I. i CAROCLINC COMPANY
- 350 HANLEY INDUSTRIAL court
- ST.nLOUIS. MISSOURI ) $3144 ._
,~ ~ ~ . - . - ~ . ..
l 4 l 1 I i UNITED STATES OF AMERICA NUCLEAR REGULATORY COMMISSION BEFORE THE ATOMIC SAFETY AND LICENSING BOARD In the Matter of )
)
TEXAS UTILITIES ELECTRIC ) Docket Nos. 50-445 and COMPANY, et al. ) 50-446
)
(Comanche Peak Steam Electric ) (Application for Station, Units 1 and 2) ) Operating Licenses) CERTIFICATE OF SERVICE I hereby certify that copies of " Applicants' Motion for Summary Disposition Regarding Trip Report of J.J. Lipinsky," in the above-captioned matter was_ served upon the following persons by express delivery (*), or deposit in the United States mail, first class, postage prepaid, this 1st day of October, 1984, or by hand delivery (**) on the 2nd day of October, 1984.
** Peter B. Bloch, Esq. Chairman, Atomic Safety and Chairman, Atomic Safety and Licensing Appeal Panel Licensing Board U.S. Nuclear Regulatory U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Commission Washington, D.C. 20555 Washington, D.C. 20555 Mr. William L. Clements *Dr. Walter H. Jordan Docketing & Service Branch 881 West Outer Drive U.S. Nuclear Regalatory Oak Ridge, Tennessee 37830 Commission Washington, D.C. 20555 *Dr. Kenneth A. McCollom Dean, Division of Engineering Architecture and Technology **Stuart A. Treby, Esq.
Oklahoma State University Office of the Executive Stillwater, Oklahoma 74074 Legal Dirsctor U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Mr. John Collins Commission Regional Administrator, Washington, D.C. 20555 Region IV U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Chairman, Atomic Safety and Commission Licensing Board Panel 611 Ryan Plaza Drive U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Suite 1000 Commission Arlington, Texas 76011 Washington, D.C. 20555
Renea Hicks, Esq. *Mrs. Juanita Ellis Assistant Attorney. General- President, CASE Environmental' Protection 1426 South Polk Street Division Dallas, Texas- 75224 P.O. Box 12548
' Capitol Station Ellen Ginsberg, Esquire Austin, Texas 78711 Atomic Safety and Licensing Board Panel Lanny A. Sinkin U.S. Nuclear Regulatory 114 W. 7th Street Commission Suite 220 Washington, D.C. 20555 Austin, Texas 78701 a
4 W&dL William A. Horin cc: John W. Beck Robert Wooldridge, Esq. m
- _ .}}